®
®
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer
User Manual
Manual Part Number - 61200290L1-1G
4205290L1 AC Non-Redundant Version with Modem
4205290L2 AC Redundant Version with Modem
4205290L3 DC Non-Redundant Version with Modem
4205290L4 DC Redundant Version with Modem
4205290L5 AC Non-Redundant Version
4205290L6 AC Redundant Version
4205290L7 DC Non-Redundant Version
4205290L8 DC Redundant Version
1205288L1 Controller Card
1205288L2 Controller Card
1200291L1 Breakout Panel
4175043L2 Battery Backup
1200657L2 Battery Backup Adapter Cable
1200287L1 Amp to Punch-Down Cable 25 ft.
1200287L5 Amp to Punch-Down Cable 50 ft.
1200287L7 Amp to Punch-Down Cable 100 ft.
1200291L5 BNC patch panel
1200466L1 Fan Faceplate
61200290L1-1G
October 2004
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer System Manual
Revision History
Document
Revision
Date
Description of Changes
G
Oct. 2004
This revision of the MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual has been updated to
include new features for the System Control Unit (P/N 1185002L2).
Conventions
The following typographical conventions are used in this document:
This font indicates a cross-reference link. First-time references to tables and figures are
shown in this font.
This font indicates screen menus, fields, and parameters.
THIS FONT indicates keyboard keys (ENTER, ESC, ALT). Keys that are to be pressed simulta-
neously are shown with a plus sign (ALT+X indicates that the ALT key and X key should be
pressed at the same time).
This font indicates references to other documentation, sections of documents, and is also
used for emphasis.
This fontindicates on-screen messages and prompts.
This fontindicates text to be typed exactly as shown.
This font indicates silkscreen labels or other system label items.
This font is used for strong emphasis
NOTE
Notes inform the user of additional but essential information or features.
CAUTION
Cautions inform the user of potential damage, malfunction, or disruption
to equipment, software, or environment.
WARNING
Warnings inform the user of potential bodily pain, injury, or death.
61200290L1-1G
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer System Manual
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio frequencies. Operation of this equipment in a residential area
is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
NOTE
Shielded cables must be used with this unit to ensure compliance with
Class A FCC limits.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Canadian Emissions Requirements
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from
digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled
“Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Department of Communications.
Cet appareil nuerique respecte les limites de bruits radioelectriques applicables aux
appareils numeriques de Class A prescrites dans la norme sur le materiel brouilleur:
“Appareils Numeriques,” NMB-003 edictee par le ministre des Communications.
Canadian Equipment Limitations
Notice: The Canadian Industry and Science Canada label identifies certified equipment.
This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network
protective, operational, and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the
equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected
to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be
installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company’s inside
wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a
certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware
that compliance with the above limitations may not prevent degradation of service in some
situations.
iv
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer System Manual
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance
facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this
equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause
to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the
power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
should contract the appropriate electric inspection authority or an electri-
cian, as appropriate.
The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the
total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device, to prevent
overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject
only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all devices does not exceed
100.
Training
ADTRAN offers product training. The training courses include overviews on product
features and functions while covering applications of ADTRAN’s product lines.
ADTRAN provides a variety of training options, including customized training and course
taught at our facilities or at customer sites. For more information about training, please
contact us.
Training Phone:
Training Fax:
800-615-1176, ext. 7500
256-963-6700
Training Email:
training@adtran.com
61200290L1-1G
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer System Manual
This page is intentionally blank.
vi
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Contents
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. Controller Card 1:1 Redundancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
3. T3 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
4. SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Network Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
5. Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
6. TL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
7. Available Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Breakout Panel (P/N 1200291L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
E1 Patch Panel (P/N 1200291L5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Battery Backup (P/N 4175043L2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Fan Faceplate (P/N 1200466L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Installation and Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2. Receiving Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3. ADTRAN Shipping Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
4. Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
5. Rackmount Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Connecting the Breakout Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Connecting the E1 Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
6. Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
LAN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Modem Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Noncritical and Critical Alarm Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
DSX-3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
DSX-1/E1 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
7. Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
61200290L1-1G
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Craft Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Establishing Terminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Navigating Within the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Telnet Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Privilege Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
ACO Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
LED Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Power Supply A/B Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Controller Cards Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
T1/E1 Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
8. Replacing or Installing Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2. Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
DS3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Line Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Remote Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
XCV Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Protection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Active Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Network Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Maximum Switch Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Min. Switching Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Loopback Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Shutdown Stand-By . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
DS2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3. T1/E1 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
T1/E1 State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Set Multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
T1/E1 Line Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
T1/E1 Line Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
T1/E1 Loopback Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
T1/E1 Circuit Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
T1/E1 Line Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
XCV Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
4. System Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Management Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
viii
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Contents
Local IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Gateway IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Modem Remote IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Management Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Forward IP to Remote DS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
DS3 Remote IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
DS3 IP MTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Dialup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Primary and Secondary Phone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Initializing String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Dial String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Maximum Redial Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Idle Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Connection Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Pause Between Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Dialout On Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Answer on Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Modem Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Modem Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Hangup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Last Modem Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
SNMP Management Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
SNMP State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Trap IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Trap Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Read Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Write Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Trap Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
System Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Network Date/Time Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Server IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Refresh Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
DST Automatic Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Local Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
User Account Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Guest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
RADIUS Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
RADIUS State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Server IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
UDP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Privilege Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Shared Secret Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Shared Secret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Response Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Maximum Retries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Terminal Time Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
61200290L1-1G
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
IP Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
IP Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Alarm Relay Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Equipment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Unit ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Facility ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Location ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Frame ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Unit Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Equipment Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Syslog Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Host IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Severity Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Host Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Auto Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Craft Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
5. Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Loading Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Load Default Settings Other Than System Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Load System Management Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Load All Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Updating Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Update Via XModem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Configuration Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Saving to a TFTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Retrieving from a TFTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Resetting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
6. Save Configuration and Alarm Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
2. DS3 State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Rx Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
3. Power Supply State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4. System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Card Comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
5. DS2 State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
6. T1/E1 State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
x
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Contents
7. Acknowledge Alarms (ACO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. Viewing Statistical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
DS3 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
24 Hour Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Performance Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Interval starting at: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Unavailable Seconds (UAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Line Coding Violation (LCV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Line Errored Seconds (LES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
P-Bit Errored Seconds (PES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
P-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (PSES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
P-Bit Coding Violations (PCV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
C-Bit Code Violations (CCV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
C-Bit Errored Seconds (CES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
C-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
F-Bit Errors (FBE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Far End Block Error (FEBE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Clear All Local DS3 Statistics/Refresh All Remote Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
DS2 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
24-Hour Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Performance Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
T1/E1 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
3. Protection Switch Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Performance Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Alarm Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
2. T1/E1 Loopbacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Data Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Analog Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Digital Line/Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Codec Line/Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Remote Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
CSU Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
CSU Loopback w/BERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Line BERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
3. DS3 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Line Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Digital Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
61200290L1-1G
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Metallic Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Remote Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Remote All T1/E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
4. DS2 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
DS2 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Circuit and Network Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
2. Nonredundant Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
3. Circuit Failure Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
4. Circuit and Network Failure Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Power Loss Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
2. Nonredundant Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
3. Power Supply Recovery Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
4. Power Supply and Source Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
5. Battery Backup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Transaction Language 1 (TL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
2. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
3. TL1 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
TL1 Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Acknowledgment Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
In Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
All Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Output Response Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Autonomous Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
4. TL1 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
TL1 Autonomous Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
5. TL1 Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
TL1 Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
TL1 Editing Examples: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Data Dictionaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
TL1 Loopback Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
xii
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Contents
Acceptance Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
2. Verifying the Installed Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
3. Configuring the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Accessing the Craft Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Provisioning the DS3 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
DS3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Protection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
DS2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Provisioning the DS1 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Alarm Relay Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
4. Verifying the Data Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
DS1 Daisy-Chain to DS3 (Hard) Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
DS1 to DS3 Head-to-Head Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
DS1 to DS3 (Hard) Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
5. Verifying Alarm Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Critical Alarm Relay Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Noncritical Alarm Relay Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
6. Verifying System Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Power Supply Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Single Power Supply Module / Dual Power Feeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Dual Power Supply Modules / Dual Power Feeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Controller Card Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
7. Restoring Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
8. Configuring the System for Traffic Readiness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
9. Signing-off the MX2800 ATP Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Specifications Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
2. Specifications and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
DSX-3 Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
DSX-1 Interface(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
DS3 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
DS2 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
DSX-1 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
61200290L1-1G
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
VT100 Terminal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
SNMP/Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Agency Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Acronyms/Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
1. Warranty and Customer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
2. ADTRAN Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
3. ADTRAN Technical Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
4. ADTRAN Repair/CAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
5. Repair and Return Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
xiv
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Contents
Figures
Figure 1-1. E1 Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Figure 1-2. Installing Fan Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Figure 2-1. DC Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-2. The Breakout Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-3. MX2800 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-4. MX2800 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2-5. Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Figure 2-6. Status Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Figure 2-7. Statistics Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 2-8. Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 2-9. Loopback Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-10.Telnet Client Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Figure 2-11.Replacing or Installing Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Figure 3-1. Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Figure 3-2. Configuration Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Figure 3-3. Network Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Figure 3-4. T1/E1 Interface Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-5. T1/E1 State Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3-6. Set Multiple Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-7. T1/E1 Line Coding Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Figure 3-8. T1/E1 Line Length Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 3-9. Loopback Detection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Figure 3-10.Circuit Protection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Figure 3-11.Line Identification Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Figure 3-12.System Management Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Figure 3-13.Dialup Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Figure 3-14.Trap Generation Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Figure 3-15. Alarm Relay Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Figure 3-16.Equipment Identification Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Figure 3-17.System Utilities Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Figure 3-18.Indication of a Saved Configuration and Alarm Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Figure 4-1. Status Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Figure 5-1. Statistics Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Figure 5-2. DS3 Statistics Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Figure 5-3. DS3 Current 15 Minute Alarm Count Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Figure 5-4. DS3 24-Hour Alarm History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Figure 5-5. DS3 Performance Parameters (Current 15 Minutes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Figure 5-6. DS3 Performance Parameters (24 Hour History). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Figure 5-7. DS3 Performance Parameters (Totals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Figure 5-8. DS2 Current 15 Minute Alarm Count Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Figure 5-9. DS2 RAI 24-Hour Alarm History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Figure 5-10.DS2 Performance Parameters (Current 15 Minutes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Figure 5-11.DS2 PBERR 24-Hour Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Figure 5-12.T1/E1 Port Local Statistics Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Figure 5-13.Protection Switch Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Figure 5-14.Alarm Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Figure 6-1. Loopback Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Figure 6-2. Loopback Control Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Figure 6-3. Tributary Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
61200290L1-1G
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Figure 6-4. Analog Network Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Figure 6-5. Digital Line/Network Loopback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Figure 6-6. Codec Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Figure 6-7. Loopback Menu with BERT Selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Figure 6-8. DS3 Loopback Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Figure 6-9. Line Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Figure 6-10.Digital Loopback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Figure 6-11.Metallic Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Figure 6-12.DS2 Loopback Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Figure 6-13.DS2 Network Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Figure 7-1. Nonredundant Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Figure 7-2. Circuit Failure Recovery Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Figure 7-3. Circuit and Network Failure Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Figure 8-1. Nonredundant Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Figure 8-2. Power Supply Failure Recovery Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Figure 8-3. Power Supply and Source Failure Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Figure 8-4. Battery Backup System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
xvi
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Contents
Tables
Table 2-1. DC Connector Symbol Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Table 2-2. MX2800 Review View Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Table 2-3. LED Conditions for Active Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Table 2-4. LED Conditions for Standby Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Table 2-5. T1/E1 LED Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Table 3-1. XCV Threshold Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Table 3-2. XCV Threshold Limits for T1/E1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Table 3-3. Trap Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Table 3-4. Console Menu User Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Table 3-5. Types of Alarms in Alarm Relay Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Table 3-6. Syslog Severity Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Table 3-7. Self-Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Table 4-1. Network State Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Table 4-2. Alarm Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Table 4-3. Remote Alarm Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Table 4-4. Power Supply Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Table 4-5. System State Alarm Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Table 4-6. Controller Card States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Table 4-7. Protection Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Table 4-8. DS2 States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Table 4-9. T1/E1 States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Table 5-1. Alarm Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Table 7-1. Configuration Requirements for Circuit Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Table 9-1. TL1 Account Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Table 9-2. TL1 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Table 9-3. MX2800 Alarm Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Table 9-4. MX2800 Informational Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Table 9-5. TL1 Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Table 9-6. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Table 9-7. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Table 9-8. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Table 9-9. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for EQPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Table 9-10. DS3 TL1 Loopback Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Table 9-11. DS2 TL1 Loopback Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Table 9-12. DS1 TL1 Loopback Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Table A-1. MX2800 ATP Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Table B-1. Craft Port Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Table B-2. LAN Port Pin Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Table B-3. Modem Port Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Table B-4. Amphenol Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
61200290L1-1G
xvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
This page is intentionally blank.
xviii
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 1, PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Section 1
Product Overview
1. INTRODUCTION
The MX2800 is an M13 multiplexer that consolidates T1 and E1 signals into a T3 circuit. This unit
provides a cost-effective, versatile tool for combining independent T1s, E1s, or a combination of the two
over the same T3 circuit.
The MX2800 houses two hot-swappable controller cards which provide 1:1 redundancy for the T1 and T3
signals, as well as the T3 connections.
Embedded simple network management protocol (SNMP) and Telnet are available through the modem
port using serial line internet protocol/point-to-point protocol (SLIP/PPP) or through the 10Base-T
Ethernet port. Using the Management Information Base II (MIB II), RFC 1407 standards, and an
ADTRAN enterprise MIB, the MX2800 can be configured, monitored, and diagnosed with standard
SNMP network management programs such as Hewlett Packard’s HP OpenView™ and Cabletron’s
Spectrum®. In addition, the SysLog Host Daemon allows remote monitoring, collecting, and logging of
MX2800 events in realtime. This information is useful during installation setups and/or troubleshooting.
Complete configuration, loopbacks, and performance monitoring are available through SNMP, Telnet, or a
VT100 terminal interface. This connection can be made via Ethernet, a local EIA-232 link, or through the
built-in V.34 modem. The modem can dial out a “cry for help” for units located in unmanned facilities. The
MX2800 is designed for installation in a 19-inch or 23-inch rack.
The major features of the MX2800 are as follows:
• Built-in 1:1 redundancy
• Hot-swappable controller cards
• Independent, dual-load sharing, redundant power supplies
• Embedded SNMP and Telnet management through 10Base-T Ethernet or SLIP/PPP dialup
• Detailed performance monitoring for local and remote units
• Simplified configuration through the VT100 terminal menu structure
• Integrated V.34 modem for dial-up and dial-down access
• Capability of backhauling multiple service types (T1/E1)
• AC or DC power
• Available –48V or 24V power supplies
• External DS3 clock option
• M13 and C-bit signaling support
61200290L1-1G
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1, Product Overview
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
• NEBS Level 3 compliant
NOTE
Information regarding the built-in modem applies to the part numbers
4202290L1, 4202290L2, 4202290L3, and 4202290L4.
2. CONTROLLER CARD 1:1 REDUNDANCY
The MX2800 supports two hot-swappable controller cards which provide 1:1 redundancy for the T1 and
T3 signals and connections. With two cards installed, the MX2800 can recover from circuit or network
3. T3 OVERVIEW
A T3 provides the same bandwidth as 28 T1s. Typically, leasing a T3 line costs the same as eight to ten
T1s. Using the MX2800, a single T3 can provide internet connectivity and voice (local and long distance)
to individual sites across up to 28 individual DSX-1s. T3 is also extremely cost effective for backhauling
local and long distance voice.
4. SNMP
The MX2800’s embedded SNMP feature allows the unit to be accessed and controlled by a network
manager through the 10Base-T local area network (LAN) port. The MX2800 supports the MIB-II standard,
RFC 1213, and the ADTRAN Enterprise Specific MIB.
NOTE
MIB files are available from ADTRAN in the support section of the
The term SNMP broadly refers to the message protocols used to exchange information between the
network management system (NMS) and the managed devices, as well as to the structure of device
management databases. SNMP has three basic components: the network manager, the agent, and the MIB.
Network Manager
The network manager is a set of control programs that collect, control, and present data pertinent to the
operation of the network devices. These programs reside on a network management station.
1-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Product Overview, Section 1
Agent
The agent is a control program that resides in every network device. This program responds to queries and
commands from the network manager, returns requested information or invokes configuration changes
initiated by the manager, and sends unsolicited traps to the manager.
MIB
An MIB is an industry standard presentation of all status and configuration parameters supported by a
network device.
5. TELNET
Telnet provides a password protected, remote login facility to the MX2800 that allows a remote user to
control the MX2800 through the terminal menus. Only one Telnet menu session may be active at a time.
6. TL1
Transaction Language 1 (TL1) is an ASCII-based language that supports both command-response and
autonomous (NE) message generation. Commonly, TL1 is used over an X.25 packet network but is
completely independent of any physical layer protocols. For the MX2800, TL1 is implemented as a Telnet
session running over Ethernet or PPP. Currently, up to eight TL1 Telnet connections can be active at a time.
7. AVAILABLE OPTIONS
The following optional equipment is available for use with the MX2800. Contact a local distributor or the
ADTRAN Sales Department for more information. Refer to Appendix F, Warranty for contact information.
Breakout Panel (P/N 1200291L1)
The optional breakout panel connects to the MX2800 and provides 28 RJ connectors for the individual
T1s/E1s. Shipment includes two six-foot, 64-pin to 64-pin amphenol cables which allow direct cabling to
E1 Patch Panel (P/N 1200291L5)
The optional E1 patch panel connects to the MX2800 and provides 28 pairs of BNC connectors for E1
61200290L1-1G
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1, Product Overview
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CH 1
EARTH
CH 6
EARTH
CH 11
EARTH
CH 16
EARTH
CH 21
EARTH
CH 26
EARTH
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CH 2
EARTH
CH 7
EARTH
CH 12
EARTH
CH 17
EARTH
CH 22
EARTH
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CH 3
EARTH
CH 8
EARTH
CH 13
EARTH
CH 18
EARTH
CH 23
EARTH
CH 27
EARTH
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CH 4
EARTH
CH 9
EARTH
CH 14
EARTH
CH 19
EARTH
CH 24
EARTH
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CH 5
EARTH
CH 10
EARTH
CH 15
EARTH
CH 20
EARTH
CH 25
EARTH
CH 28
EARTH
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
O N
Figure 1-1. E1 Patch Panel
Shipment includes two six-foot, 64-pin to 64-pin amphenol cables for direct cabling to the MX2800. Refer
Battery Backup (P/N 4175043L2)
The battery backup system provides power backup in the event of power loss. This system includes the
battery, an AC battery charger, and an alarm cable.
Fan Faceplate (P/N 1200466L1)
The MX2800 fan faceplate provides the means for additional heat dissipation, allowing multiple units to be
stacked directly over each other. The fan faceplate replaces the original faceplate. It is used with the
installed on the chassis.
Figure 1-2. Installing Fan Faceplate
1-4
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION S2, INeSTcALLtAiToIONnAND2OPERATION
Installation and Operation
1. INTRODUCTION
The first three tasks for installing and operating the MX2800 are to unpack, inspect, and power up. The
next three subsections detail the tasks. Additional subsections provide information for mounting the
MX2800 into an equipment rack, making the proper connection to the back panel, identifying the front
panel indicators and modular jack, and outlining the addition or removal of a card.
2. RECEIVING INSPECTION
Carefully inspect the MX2800 for any damage that might have occurred in shipment. If damage is
suspected, file a claim immediately with the carrier, keep the original packaging for damage verification
and/or returning the unit, and contact ADTRAN Customer Service. For warranty information, refer to
3. ADTRAN SHIPPING CONTENTS
After unpacking the MX2800 unit but before an initial power up, be sure that the following items are
present:
• MX2800 unit
• DC or AC power supply (Two power supplies come with the Redundant versions.)
• Controller card (Two cards come with the Redundant versions.)
• 8-pin to 6-pin modular cable (modem version only)
• 8-pin to 8-pin modular cable
• 8-pin modular to DB-9 female connector
• Two 4-position terminal lug connectors
• 3-position terminal lug connector
• Six-foot AC power cable (AC version only)
• Mounting ears and screws for 19-inch or 23-inch rack installation
• User manual or CD containing the User Manual
61200290L1-1G
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2, Installation and Operation
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
NOTE
MIB files are available from ADTRAN in the support section of the
ADTRAN Web page at www.adtran.com.
4. POWER UP
The AC version of the MX2800 is provided with a 6-foot power cable terminated in a three-prong plug
which is connected to a grounded 120 VAC power receptacle.
NOTE
Power to the AC version of the MX2800 must be provided from a
grounded 120 VAC power receptacle.
The DC version of the MX2800 is provided with two 4-position modular terminal lug connectors. These
connectors simplify the initial wiring and connection or disconnection of the DC power when replacing
rackmount units.
NOTE
A 3-amp fuse is recommended for use in the fuse and alarm panel that
feeds the MX2800.
Once the modular connector is wired, push it firmly into one of the rear panel power connectors. Figure
2-1 on page 2-3 and Table 2-1 on page 2-3 illustrate the DC power connector and give definitions for the
four connector symbols.
NOTE
The chassis should be connected to an earth ground using the ground stud
located between the AC and DC power sources on the rear panel.
2-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Installation and Operation, Section 2
115 AC 50/60Hz
DC POWER
0.8A
DS3/STS-1
DSX-1/E1
(OUT)
L
NONCRITICAL
NO COM NC
CRITICAL
A
N
A
B
PWR
FAIL
PWR
FAIL
–
–
+
+
A
B
OUT
IN
M
O
D
E
-48V
+24V
0.7A
1.5A
T
R
S
T
R
CLK
B
S
M
CLK
DSX-1/E1
(IN)
A
-48V
+24V
0.7A
1.5A
Figure 2-1. DC Power Connector
Table 2-1. DC Connector Symbol Definitions
Symbol
Definition
PWR FAIL
Battery backup connector. If the AC fails, a trap is sent to
alert user when connected to the 4175043L2 battery
backup or equivalent system.
–
Negative side of DC power source (usually –48 VDC)
Positive side of DC power source (usually ground)
Frame Ground
RET
The following UL requirements must be met during installation of the MX2800 DC version:
1. Disconnect all power sources prior to servicing. Unit may use multiple power sources.
2. Input: Minimum 48 VDC, 0.8 amps
3. Input: Minimum 120 VAC, 0.32 amps
4. Connect to a reliably grounded –48 VDC source which is electrically isolated from the AC source. Use
24 VDC source for 1202289L3.
5. The branch circuit overcurrent protection must be a fuse or circuit breaker rated minimum 48 VDC,
maximum 20 amps.
61200290L1-1G
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2, Installation and Operation
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
6. A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably approved and rated must be incorporated in the
field wiring.
7. The chassis should be connected to an earth ground using the ground stud located between the AC and
DC power sources on the rear panel.
8. The unit must be installed in accordance with the requirements of NEC NFPA 70.
9. The unit must be installed in accordance with Articles 400 and 364.8 of the National Electrical Code
NFPA 70 when installed outside of a Restricted Access Location (i.e., Central Office, behind a locked
door, service personnel area only).
10. Care should be taken not to upset the stability of the equipment rack after installation is complete.
CAUTION
Use copper conductors only for DC power and ground connection.
5. RACKMOUNT INSTALLATION
The MX2800 can be mounted into a standard 19-inch or 23-inch equipment rack. Follow these steps to
mount the unit into a rack:
1. Install the mounting flanges on each side of the MX2800 at one of the three available positions.
CAUTION
Be sure to install the flanges with the screws provided.
2. After the flanges have been installed, position the MX2800 at the correct location within the rack and
secure the mounting flanges to the mounting rails of the rack.
3. Make all network, DTE, and power connections to the rear of the unit. Refer to Power Up on page 2-2
for more information on making the DC power connection.
4. Using the 8-position modular to DB-9 female connector and the 8-pin to 8-pin modular cable, connect
a VT100 terminal device to the CRAFT port on the front panel of the unit.
NOTE
Two MX2800s can be stacked with out any spacing between the units.
ADTRAN recommends 1U (1.75”) of separation above and below the
two stacked units. This spacing allows the units to dissipate heat. The
design of the MX2800 uses the chassis to distribute heat generated by the
unit’s internal cards. This design allows the units to operate without a
cooling fan, thus increasing overall reliability of the units.
2-4
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Installation and Operation, Section 2
Connecting the Breakout Panel
The optional breakout panel (P/N 1200291L1) connects to the MX2800 via the IN and OUT amphenol
connectors located on the back of the unit and provides 28 RJ connectors for the individual T1s/E1s.
Shipment includes two six-foot, 64-pin to 64-pin amphenol cables for direct cabling to the MX2800.
Connect the breakout panel’s IN amphenol connector to the MX2800’s IN amphenol connector and the
FRONT VIEW
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
REAR VIEW
OUT
IN
Cable 2
115 AC 50/60Hz
0.8A
DC POWER
DS3/STS-1
DSX-1/E1
(OUT)
L
A
N
NONCRITICAL
NO COM NC
CRITICAL
A
B
PWR
FAIL
PWR
FAIL
–
–
+
+
A
B
OUT
IN
-48V
+24V
0.7A
1.5A
M
O
D
E
T
R
S
T
R
CLK
B
S
Cable 1
M
CLK
DSX-1/E1
(IN)
A
Figure 2-2. The Breakout Panel
Connecting the E1 Patch Panel
The optional E1 patch panel (P/N 1200291L5) connects to the MX2800 via the TX and RX amphenol
connectors located on the back of the unit and provides 28 pairs of BNC connectors for the individual
T1/E1s. Shipment includes two 6-foot, 64-pin to 64-pin amphenol cables for direct cabling to the MX2800.
Connect the E1 patch panel’s TX amphenol connector to the MX2800’s IN amphenol connector and the E1
patch panel’s RX amphenol connector to the MX2800's OUT amphenol connector.
61200290L1-1G
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2, Installation and Operation
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
6. REAR PANEL
The MX2800 rear panel is equipped as follows:
• Ethernet local area network (LAN) port
• Modem port
• Two alarm output terminal blocks
• Two sets of DS-3 in/out jacks
• Two amphenol connectors
• DC/AC power connection
• Ground stud
• Three-prong AC connection
• Wire-wrap pins for external connection of BITS clock (STS-1)
Descriptions for the items shown in Figure 2-3 are explained in Table 2-2. Pin assignments are given in
115 AC 50/60Hz
DC POWER
0.8A
DS3/STS-1
DSX-1/E1
(OUT)
L
A
N
7
8
NONCRITICAL
NO COM NC
CRITICAL
3
A
B
1
2
PWR
FAIL
PWR
FAIL
–
+
–
+
6
B
A
OUT
IN
-48V
+24V
0.7A
1.5A
4
5
M
O
D
E
T
R
S
T
R
CLK
B
S
M
CLK
DSX-1/E1
(IN)
A
9
Figure 2-3. MX2800 Rear View
Table 2-2. MX2800 Review View Identifiers
#
Item
Function
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Ethernet LAN
Modem
10Base-T Ethernet connection
Telephone line connection for internal V.34
Connections for external audible/visual alarms
Noncritical/Critical
DS3/STS-1
DSX-1/E1
T3 service connection for controller cards A and B
64-pin female amphenol connectors for T1/E1s
DC power connection
Power
Ground stud
8
9
115 VAC 50/60 Hz
BITS Clock
AC power connection
Wire-wrap pins for external connection of BITS clocks
2-6
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Installation and Operation, Section 2
LAN Port
The LAN port is an 8-pin modular connector that provides a 10Base-T Ethernet LAN interface. This LAN
interface is used for SNMP and Telnet control.
NOTE
Connect the LAN port to intra-building wiring only.
Modem Port
The modem port is an 8-pin modular jack that provides a telephone line (POTS) connection for the internal
V.34 modem.
NOTE
Information regarding the built-in modem applies to the part numbers
4202290L1, 4202290L2, 4202290L3, and 4202290L4.
The MX2800 can be configured as a dial-in host and also as a dial-out-on-trap device (the unit dials out to
a specified host to report error conditions).
Noncritical and Critical Alarm Connectors
The alarm connectors connect to the three contacts of a Form C type relay on the main board of the
MX2800. This relay is activated any time the MX2800 detects an alarm condition on the T3 network
interface. Both NC (normally closed) and NO (normally open) contacts are provided.
Connect alarms to one of the three-position modular terminal lug connectors. These connectors simplify
the initial wiring and connection or disconnection of the alarms when replacing rackmount units. Once a
modular connector is wired, push it firmly into the rear panel NONCRITICAL or CRITICAL connector.
The alarm functions can be enabled or disabled through the Alarm Relays section of the Configuration
DSX-3 Interfaces
The DSX-3 network interfaces are full-duplex circuits provided by four BNC coaxial cable connections
(two for each controller card). The receive data from the network is connected to the Rx (IN) connectors,
while the transmit data from the MX2800 is connected to the Tx (OUT) connectors. Refer to Section 7,
Circuit and Network Redundancy for more specific information about connecting the DS3 interface in
redundant and nonredundant systems.
61200290L1-1G
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2, Installation and Operation
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
NOTE
DSX-3 interfaces must be connected using coaxial cables that have the
shields grounded at both ends.
DSX-1/E1 Interfaces
The DSX-1/E1 interfaces are 64-pin amphenol connectors. These interfaces provide Tx and Rx
connections between the unit and equipment such as wire-wrap patch panels, punch-down panels, or
breakout panels.
NOTE
Connect the DSX-1/E1 interfaces to intra-building wiring only.
Power Connection
7. FRONT PANEL
A
C
T
N
E
T
A
L
M
P
R
F
Figure 2-4. MX2800 Front Panel
Craft Port
The craft port, an 8-pin modular jack, provides connection to a VT100 EIA-232 compatible interface
(using the supplied 8-pin modular to DB-9 female connector and the 8-pin to 8-pin modular cable).
2-8
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Installation and Operation, Section 2
Establishing Terminal Connection
NOTE
A Telnet menu session has priority over a terminal menu session through
the craft port. If a terminal menu session is active when a Telnet menu
session is initiated, the terminal menu session will be disabled while the
Telnet menu session is active.
To connect the MX2800 to a VT100 terminal, follow this procedure:
1. Configure the VT100 terminal for 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 baud, 8-bit characters, no parity, and
one stop bit (xxxx, 8N1).
2. Using the ADTRAN-provided terminal interface cable adapter, connect the DTE port of a terminal to
the 8-pin modular jack labeled CRAFT on the MX2800 front panel.
3. Initialize the terminal session.
4. Press ENTER repeatedly until the username prompt appears.
5. Enter the username. The factory default username is adtran. The password prompt appears.
Main Menu
Make selections on the Main Menu by entering the number corresponding to the chosen parameter or the
NOTE
A new Telnet session may take priority over an existing one if a username
and password are provided that have ADMIN privileges
61200290L1-1G
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2, Installation and Operation
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Figure 2-5. Main Menu
NOTE
The letter displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the terminal menu
indicates which controller card is active (A or B).
Navigating Within the Menus
Navigate within the MX2800 terminal menus using the following procedures:
To...
Press...
select an item
the number corresponding to your choice,
and then press the ENTER key
scroll left and right
within the same screen
the left and right arrow keys. Additional
screens are available when < or > is dis-
played in the top portion of the menu
return to the previous
menu
the ESC key
CTRL+C
CTRL+R
end the terminal session
refresh the display
2-10
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Installation and Operation, Section 2
To...
Press...
scroll up and down
within the same screen
the up and down arrow keys. Additional
screens are available when ∧ or ∨ is dis-
played in the top portion of the menu.
The MX2800 Main Menu consists of the following sections:
Status
Provides information on the current state of the DS3, power supplies, system, DS2s, and T1/E1 lines. See
Figure 2-6. Status Menu
Statistics
Provides detailed statistical information (both current and historical) for the DS3, DS2s, and T1/E1 lines.
See Figure 2-7 on page 2-12 for the Statistics menu. Refer to Statistics on page 5-1 for more detailed
information.
61200290L1-1G
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2, Installation and Operation
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Figure 2-7. Statistics Menu
Configuration
Configuration for more detailed information.
Figure 2-8. Configuration Menu
2-12
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Installation and Operation, Section 2
Loopbacks
Performs loopback tests over the DS3, DS2s, or T1/E1 lines. See Figure 2-9 for an illustration of the
Figure 2-9. Loopback Menu
Telnet Client
A Telnet session may be established with any device visible in the network from the MX2800. See Figure
61200290L1-1G
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2, Installation and Operation
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Figure 2-10. Telnet Client Menu
From the Telnet Client menu, specify the destination IP address and the desired TCP port number. Attempt
to establish the TCP connection.
Once the connection is established, the new session becomes visible in the menu and all user inputs are
forwarded to the destination address. When the session with the destination device is terminated, the
MX2800 menu returns to the Telnet Client menu and all user input are processed locally by the MX2800.
NOTE
An attempted or established connection can be terminated by using the
escape sequence. This escape sequence is displayed for reference at the
bottom of the Telnet Client menu and consists of the control key plus the
right bracket key (CTRL+]).
A connection can be established with the Telnet Client regardless of how the MX2800 (via craft, LAN
port, modem port, or IP forwarding over the DS3 PMDL link) is accessed. The MX2800 supports only one
menu session at a time.
CAUTION
The MX2800 does not reliably support binary file transfers (XModem,
YModem, etc.) over the built-in Telnet Client because of compatibility
issues involving the handling of certain control characters by some
terminal applications and binary file transfer protocols.
2-14
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Installation and Operation, Section 2
Logout
The Logout selection ends the terminal session and logs out of the system. A valid username and password
are required before a new session can begin. The unit will also log out of a terminal session automatically
if the session remains inactive for a certain period of time. For more information, see the section Terminal
Privilege Level
The privilege level of the currently active terminal session is displayed in this field.
ACO Buttons
The ACO (alarm cut off) buttons turn off an active audible alarm. Since the buttons are recessed, use a pen
or other pointed instrument to press them. Once an ACO button deactivates an alarm, the alarm remains
disabled until the condition has cleared.
Alarms can also be turned off remotely by using a selection found in the Status menu. For more
LED Descriptions
The MX2800 has LED status indicators for the power supplies, the DS3 state, the controller cards, and the
individual T1s/E1s. These LEDs are identified below:
Power Supply A/B Status LEDs
The PWR LED is active when the unit is on and receiving full power. The CHK LED is active when the
power supply is failing or is providing low power and needs to be checked.
Controller Cards Status LEDs
The STATUS LEDs apply to the two controller cards. The LEDs provided are ACT (active), DS3, ALM
(alarm), and PRF (performance). Various conditions are indicated by the state of the LED (its color and
whether it blinks, alternates color, or is on solid). The condition descriptions vary depending on whether
the LED represents the active controller card or the controller card on standby. The following tables
provide LED definitions for the active cards (see Table 2-3 on page 2-16) and T1/E1 cards (see Table 2-4
61200290L1-1G
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2, Installation and Operation
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Table 2-3. LED Conditions for Active Cards
LED
ACT
LED State
Card Condition
Green solid
Normal (all OK)
Green/amber alternating
Red solid
Normal + console open
Self test failed
Amber solid
Software update in progress
Self test failed + console open
Card failure
Red/amber alternating
Red blinking
NET
Green solid
Normal (all OK)
Red blinking
LOS
Red solid
AIS, LOF, RAI, idle alarms
In test (Local)
Amber solid
Amber flashing
Red/amber alternating
Green solid
In test (Remote)
In test with alarms
ALM
Normal (no alarm)
Red blinking
Critical alarm
Red solid
Non-critical alarm
Amber blinking
Amber solid
Critical alarm suppressed (ACO button was pushed)
Non-critical alarm suppressed (ACO button was pushed)
Normal (all OK)
PRF
Green solid
Red flash (once per event)
Red blinking
Single/burst CV
Continuous code violations
Red solid
NOTE
The PRF (performance) LED refers to the DS3 only
2-16
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Installation and Operation, Section 2
Table 2-4. LED Conditions for Standby Cards
LED
ACT
LED State
Card Condition
Green blinking
Amber solid
Red blinking
Off
Normal (all OK)
Software update in progress
Self test failed
NET
Normal (all OK)
DS3 failure
Red blinking
Off
ALM
PRF
Normal (no alarm)
Normal (all OK)
Off
T1/E1 Status LEDs
These LEDs apply to each individual T1 or E1. Various conditions are indicated by the state of the LED
(its color and whether it blinks, alternates color, or is on solid). The condition descriptions vary depending
on whether the LEDs represent T1s or E1s of the active controller card or the controller card on standby.
Table 2-5. T1/E1 LED Conditions
LED
LED State
T1/E1 Condition
Active
Card
Green solid
Normal (all OK)
Disabled
Off
Red blinking
Red flash (once per event)
Red solid
LOS
Single/burst CV
Amber solid
In test (Local)
Green/amber alternating
Red/amber alternating
Off
In test (Remote)
In test with alarms
Standby
Card
Normal (all OK)
or
N/A (in the case of E1 configuration)
Red blinking
T1/E1 failure
61200290L1-1G
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2, Installation and Operation
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
8. REPLACING OR INSTALLING CARDS
The MX2800 is designed with hot-swappable controller cards and power supplies. To replace or install a
controller card or power supply, remove the front cover of the MX2800 with a phillips head screwdriver.
Once the front of the MX2800 has been removed, the power supply and controller card slots will be
visible. The two power supplies are located at the left of the chassis, and the controller cards are stacked on
the right side of the chassis. To remove a card, use the locking lever(s) to pull the backplane connector
away from the backplane. Once the backplane connector has been disconnected, carefully pull the card
straight out of the chassis. To replace or install a card, line up the card with the guide grooves and carefully
insert the card into the chassis until the backplane connector reaches the backplane. Finally, use the locking
levers to seat the card all the way into the slot of the chassis. Once all cards have been replaced or installed,
Figure 2-11. Replacing or Installing Cards
2-18
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 3, CONFIGURATION
Section 3
Configuration
1. INTRODUCTION
To configure the MX2800, use a 10Base-T Ethernet connection, a SLIP/PPP modem port, or a VT100
NOTE
A Telnet menu session has priority over a terminal menu session through
the craft port. If a terminal menu session is active when a Telnet menu
session is initiated, the terminal menu session will be disabled until the
Telnet session is closed.
Figure 3-1. Configuration Menu
Detailed descriptions of the menu selections are given in the following subsections. The Configuration
menu provides the following five submenus:
61200290L1-1G
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
3-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
C-BIT*
M13
Disabled
FEAC/C-BIT*
FEAC
Loop*
Local
Framing
Timing
DS3 Configuration
Network Interface
Protection Configuration
C-BIT
Remote Loopbacks
XCV Threshold
Disabled*
IE-3
Miscellaneous
A
B
DS2 Configuration
IE-4
Active Controller
DS2 1-7
IE-5
Disabled*
IE-6
Network Protection
Auto Enable Delay
Enabled
Max Switch Threshold (3)*
Min Switch Period (10)*
State
T1 # 1-28
T1 # 1-28
T1 # 1-28
Line Coding
Line Length
Loopback Time Out
Shutdown Standby
Disabled
T1/E1 Interface
Disabled
1 min.
Loopback Detection
Circuit Protection
Line Identification
Enabled
5 min.*
10 min.
15 min.
30 min.
45 min.
1 hour
Auto Enable*
AMI
T1 # 1-28
XCV Threshold
B8ZS*
Disabled*
Disabled*
CSU
0-133 ft.*
T1 # 1-28
IE-3
IE-4
IE-5
IE-6
133-266 ft.
266-399 ft.
399-533 ft.
533-655 ft.
NIU
Disabled
Enabled*
T1 # 1-28
Local IP Address
Mgmt Options
Gateway IP Address
Subnet Mask
Controller Traps
Modem Rmt IP Addr (List 1)
Management Port
Power Supply Alarm Traps
DS3 Alarm Traps
SNMP State
Trap IP Address
Forward IP to Remote DS3
DS3 Remote IP Address
DS3 IP MTU
DS2 Alarm Traps
Trap Generation
T1/E1 Alarm Traps
Read Community Name
Write Community Name
Trap Community Name
System Name
MIB II Standard Alarm Traps
System Management
Dialup Options (List 1)
SNMP Mgmt Options
State
Network Date/ Time Options
Radius State
Server IP Address
Server IP Address
UDP Port
Refresh Period
DST Automatic Adjustment
Local Time Zone
Privilege Level
Shared Secret Visibility
Radius Mgmt options
Local User Accounts
User Account Management
Terminal Timeout
IP Security
System Security
Shared Secret
Response Timeout
Maximum Retries
Date
Time
Date & Time
IP Hosts
Alarm Relay Configuration
Equipment Identification
Syslog Setup
Miscellaneous
Load Default settings OTHER THAN system management
Load SYSTEM MANAGEMENT default settings
Load Default Settings
Auto Save
Utilities
Load ALL default settings
Update via XMODEM
Craft baud rate
Update FLASH Software
Configuration Transfer
System Reset
Update via TFTP Server
Save Configuration & Alarm Log
* = default settings
Figure 3-2. Configuration Menu Tree
61200290L1-1G
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
2. NETWORK INTERFACE
Select Network Interface to access the network configuration parameters. See Figure 3-3. Configure the
MX2800 network settings to match the DS3 signal received from the service provider.
Figure 3-3. Network Configuration Menu
DS3 Configuration
The DS3 Configuration selections are used to configure the DS3 network settings to match the desired
application. Descriptions of these settings are explained below.
Framing
The framing format is used to match the format of the receive signal at the network interface. The MX2800
supports C-bit and M13 framing formats.
NOTE
M13 may not be selected when IP Forwarding is active.
Line Length
The line length is set to reflect the physical length of the DS3 network line.
• Long should be used if the cabling distance exceeds 225 feet.
• Short should be used if the distance is less than 225 feet.
3-4
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
NOTE
First and second generation DS3 controller cards (P/N 1200288Lx and P/
N 1202288Lx) use Long for distances over 50 feet and Short for distances
under 50 feet.
NOTE
Fifth generation DS3 controller cards (P/N 1205288Lx) do not require a
DS3 line length setting; therefore, Line Length does not appear as a menu
item.
Timing
When the MX2800 is connected to a network that provides timing, configure the MX2800 for LOOP
timing to derive timing from the network. If the MX2800 is the master timing source for the circuit,
configure the MX2800 to LOCAL. In applications where two MX2800s are connected back-to-back with
an un-channelized DS3, configure one MX2800 to LOOP and one MX2800 to LOCAL.
Remote Loopbacks
The following four options are available for remote loopbacks:
• FEAC/C-BIT is used to allow the MX2800 to respond to remote loopback requests received over either
the DS3 Far End Alarm and Control (FEAC) channel and/or DS2-level C bits. This mode is valid in
both C-BIT and M13 framing formats.
• FEAC is used to allow the MX2800 to respond only to remote loopback requests received over the DS3
FEAC channel. This mode is valid only when using C-BIT framing. In this mode, DS2 C-bit loopbacks
will be ignored.
• C-BIT is used to allow the MX2800 to respond only to remote loopback requests received over DS2 C
bits. This mode is available when operating in either C-BIT or M13 framing. In this mode, FEAC
loopbacks received when operating in C-BIT framing will be ignored.
• Disabled is used to ignore all out-of-band loopback requests (FEAC and DS2 C-BIT). When Disabled
is selected, the MX2800 will still respond to individual T1 in-band CSU/NIU loopbacks if so configured
in the T1/E1 Loopback Detection menu.
NOTE
Choose FEAC/C-BIT via menus in either C-BIT or M13 framing modes;
however, there is no FEAC channel when framing is set to M13.
Therefore, no DS3 far end alarms or loopback requests via the FEAC will
be valid when the MX2800 is configured for M13.
61200290L1-1G
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
XCV Threshold
Excessive code violations (XVC) Threshold sets a limit on CVs accepted by the unit before it switches
controller cards. If set to Disabled, code violations will not cause the unit to switch controller cards. The
Table 3-1. XCV Threshold Limits
Setting
The unit switches controller cards if...
-3
More than one out of every 1,000 bits received on the DS3 contains a code violation
More than one out of every 10,000 bits received on the DS3 contains a code violation
More than one out of every 100,000 bits received on the DS3 contains a code violation
More than one out of every 1,000,000 bits received on the DS3 contains a code violation
1E
-4
1E
-5
1E
-6
1E
Protection Configuration
The MX2800 houses two controller cards for 1:1 protection against hardware failure. The two cards can
also provide network protection, supporting two T3 circuits simultaneously. The selections in this menu
allow customizing the unit’s protection setup.
Active Controller
This field displays A or B, indicating the active controller card. This setting can be used to force the
controller cards to switch. For example, if controller card A is active and B is selected, a switch-over
occurs immediately.
Network Protection
This field enables or disables the unit’s ability to automatically route information to the backup T3 in the
event of a primary T3 failure. If enabled, all information is automatically routed to the backup T3. If
disabled, the stand-by controller protects against failures of the active controller.
Maximum Switch Threshold
The value entered in this field determines the number of times per hour the unit is allowed to switch
between controller cards. If, in an hour, the cards switch more than the Maximum Number of Switches, the
unit issues a trap and stops switching cards for the next 24 hours. Refer to Trap Descriptions on page 3-22.
The default setting is three times an hour. This count may be cleared by clearing Protection Switch alarm
Min. Switching Period
After the unit switches controller cards, the number of seconds entered in this field must pass before
another card switch will be allowed. The default setting is 10 seconds.
3-6
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Miscellaneous
The Miscellaneous menu selections are used to configure the Loopback Timeout and Shutdown Stand-by
settings. Descriptions of these settings are explained below.
Loopback Timeout
The Loopback Timeout option is used to set the loopback timeout to one of the following:
• Disabled
• 1 min.
• 5 min.
• 10 min.
• 15 min.
• 30 min.
• 45 min.
• 1 hr.
• 120 min.
Shutdown Stand-By
The Shutdown Stand-by option causes the system to disable the standby controller card, thus making it
unavailable for protection switches. Once this option has been selected and the standby controller has been
shut down, the option changes to Reset Stand-by. Selecting this option resets and reactivates the standby
controller, thus making it available for protection switching.
DS2 Configuration
The MX2800 can individually frame each of the seven DS2 streams in M12 (four T1s) or G.747 (three
E1s) format. When set to M12 (4xT1), the four T1s for the selected group are framed per ANSI T1.107.
When set to G.747 (3xE1), the first three T1/E1 ports of the selected group are framed per CCITT G.747
into the DS3 stream. The fourth T1/E1 port of the selected group is not available in this mode. Any combi-
nation of M12 (4xT1) and G.747 (3xE1) is allowed.
61200290L1-1G
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
3. T1/E1 INTERFACE
The T1/E1 Interface menu, see Figure 3-4, is used to activate/deactivate individual T1s and E1s and to set
their line coding, length, loopback detection, circuit protection, and line ID string. The T1/E1 code viola-
tion threshold is also configured through this menu. Configuration selections are described in the following
sections.
NOTE
A DS2 can be divided into either three E1s or four T1s. Therefore, when
dealing with an E1 configuration, some of the fields in the T1/E1
Interface menus do not apply (and therefore display N/A).
Figure 3-4. T1/E1 Interface Menu
3-8
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
T1/E1 State
The T1/E1 lines are set to Disabled, Enabled, or Auto Enable. In Auto Enable, the port is not fully enabled
(and alarms are not issued) until a T1/E1 signal is detected on that port’s receiver for a specified period of
time. See Figure 3-5 on page 3-9. This period of time is set by the Auto Enable Delay option. The options
are as follows:
• 2 seconds (default)
• 1 hour
• 2 hours
• 12 hours
• 1 day
• 2 days
• 7 days
Figure 3-5. T1/E1 State Menu
Set Multiple
The Set Multiple, see Figure 3-6 on page 3-10, option is used to enable or disable a contiguous group or all
of the T1/E1s at one time. To enable or disable all T1/E1s, set First to 1 and Last to 28. Enter Apply settings
before leaving the menu. To enable or disable only some of the T1/E1s, set First and Last to correspond to
the desired lines. Enter Apply settings. Either leave the menu at this point or continue to enter new First and
Last numbers for other lines.
61200290L1-1G
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
NOTE
Settings should be applied following each change.
Figure 3-6. Set Multiple Menu
T1/E1 Line Coding
Set the line code for each individual T1/E1 interface to match the connected device. See Figure 3-7 on
page 3-11. The choices available for T1 are AMI and B8ZS. The choices available for E1 are AMI and
HDB3. Select Set Multiple to set a contiguous group or all of the T1s (or E1s) to the same value at the
3-10
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Figure 3-7. T1/E1 Line Coding Menu
T1/E1 Line Length
Set the line length for each T1 interface according to the distance from the MX2800 to the connecting DSX
termination. See Figure 3-8 on page 3-12. The E1 Line Length is not selectable and remains at 0-6 dB
loss. Select Set Multiple to configure the line length for a contiguous group or all of the T1s to the same
length at the same time. Refer to Set Multiple on page 3-9 for a description of the Set Multiple option.
61200290L1-1G
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Figure 3-8. T1/E1 Line Length Menu
T1/E1 Loopback Detection
The T1/E1 Loopback Detection option is used to set how the T1/E1 lines respond to loopback requests
3-12
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Figure 3-9. Loopback Detection Menu
The following options are available for detection:
• Disabled is used to cause the T1/E1 lines to ignore in-band loop-up and loop-down codes.
• CSU is used to cause the channel to loop up or loop down when it receives a CSU loop-up or loop-down
pattern for more than 5 seconds.
• NIU is used to cause the channel to loop up or loop down when it receives an NIU loop-up or loop-down
pattern for more than 5 seconds.
Select Set Multiple to set a contiguous group or all of the T1/E1s to the same value at the same time. Refer
T1/E1 Circuit Protection
T1/E1 Circuit Protection determines which circuit is allowed to initiate a protection switch if a failure in
the circuitry for that channel is detected. See Figure 3-10 on page 3-14. If a T1/E1 is set to Disabled, the
failure of the circuitry of that one channel does not cause a protection switch. If set to Enabled, the failure
of a channel causes a protection switch to occur if the Protection Threshold setting in this menu is
exceeded.
61200290L1-1G
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Figure 3-10. Circuit Protection Menu
The Protection Threshold setting determines how many of the Enabled lines must fail before a card switch
occurs. If the failure of a single protected (enabled) line is to cause a card switch, set the Protection Thresh-
old to 1. Choices include 1 through 28.
Select Set Multiple to set a contiguous group or all of the T1/E1s to the same value at the same time. Refer
T1/E1 Line Identification
This field is used to enter user-configurable text strings to name the individual T1/E1 lines. See Figure 3-
11 on page 3-15. This field will accept up to 18-alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special
characters.
3-14
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Figure 3-11. Line Identification Menu
XCV Threshold
This value sets a limit on excessive code violations (ECVs) accepted by the unit over an individual T1/E1
line before it switches controller cards. If set to Disabled, code violations will not cause the unit to switch
Table 3-2. XCV Threshold Limits for T1/E1
Setting
The unit switches controller cards if...
-3
More than one out of every 1,000 bits received on a T1/E1 line contains a code violation
More than one out of every 10,000 bits received on a T1/E1 line contains a code violation
More than one out of every 100,000 bits received on a T1/E1 line contains a code violation
More than one out of every 1,000,000 bits received on a T1/E1 line contains a code violation
1E
-4
1E
-5
1E
-6
1E
61200290L1-1G
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
4. SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
page 3-16. Embedded SNMP and Telnet are available via a SLIP/PPP modem port or 10Base-T Ethernet
interface. This menu also includes options used to customize the unit’s alarm and trap generation, security
setup, and equipment identification. The fields of the System Management Configuration menu vary
depending upon the configuration of the options in the shelf.
Figure 3-12. System Management Configuration Menu
CAUTION
Configuration changes to Local IP Address, Gateway IP Address, Subnet
Mask, and IP Hosts will not be implemented unless all Telnet sessions are
closed. Changes made while Telnet sessions are active will invoke a
warning message on the console.
NOTE
If the unit is not equipped with an internal modem, Dialup Option will not
be available.
3-16
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Management Options
The Management options sets the fields that allow SNMP, Telnet, or VT100 interface access. The options
are listed below.
Local IP Address
This field is used to enter the MX2800 IP address. This IP address applies to the LAN or modem port when
configured for SLIP/PPP. This address is available from a network administrator.
Gateway IP Address
This field is used to enter the gateway IP address of the MX2800. This address is necessary only if the
MX2800 and the network manager are connected through a gateway node. If an IP packet is to be sent to a
different network, the unit sends it to the gateway.
Subnet Mask
This field is used to enter the subnet mask of the MX2800. This address is available from a network admin-
istrator.
Modem Remote IP Address
This field is used to enter the IP address of a server that accesses the MX2800 via a modem over PPP or
SLIP. This option is available only if the Management Port is set to LAN + MODEM or DS3 + MODEM.
Management Port
This field is used to assign the management port as either LAN, MODEM, LAN+MODEM, DS3, or
DS3+MODEM. The Modem setting applies only to units equipped with an internal modem.
Forward IP to Remote DS3
This field is used to enable or disable the IP forwarding feature that allows IP access to a remote MX2800
across the DS3 channel. With this feature, the far-end MX2800 appears as if it is on the same LAN as the
near-end MX2800. To access any IP related feature on the far-end unit, address packets to the IP address of
the far-end unit.
NOTE
If the near-end and far-end MX2800s are currently on the same LAN, it is
important to configure the far-end MX2800 Management Port option for
DS3 or DS3 + MODEM before enabling Forward IP To Remote DS3 on
the near-end unit. Doing so prevents multiple MAC addresses from being
associated with the same IP address in the networks ARP tables.
61200290L1-1G
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
NOTE
The DS3 must be up and running error-free and using C-Bit framing (this
feature will not work with M13 framing). The Management Port option
for the near-end unit (one connected to the Ethernet LAN) must be set to
either LAN or LAN + MODEM. A valid IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Default Gateway must be entered for the near-end unit.
DS3 Remote IP Address
If Forward IP to Remote DS3 is Enabled, set the DS3 Remote IP Address to a valid IP address on the same
subnet as the near-end unit. All packets that are sent to this IP address will be forwarded across the DS3
channel to the far-end unit.
NOTE
The IP Address of the remote unit must be the same as the one that is
entered for the DS3 Remote IP Address in the near-end unit's menus. The
Management Port option for the far-end unit must also be set to DS3 or
DS3+MODEM to be managed remotely over the DS3. The Subnet Mask
and Default Gateway do not need to be set in the far-end unit's menus.
The DS3 Remote IP Address must be on the same subnet as the Local IP
Address.
DS3 IP MTU
This field is used to select the maximum IP datagram size (in bytes) for the IP forwarding link over the
DS3. This option should be left at it default and preferred value of 260. If and only if the device on the
other side of the DS3 facility is an ADTRAN device that also has this option, then both side can be set to
1500 to avoid fragmentation of large packets. Otherwise, leave the setting at 260 to avoid lost packets.
Dialup Options
This field is used to configure the dialup capabilities of the MX2800. See Figure 3-13. These options
apply only to units equipped with an internal modem.
3-18
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Figure 3-13. Dialup Options Menu
Primary and Secondary Phone Numbers
When the MX2800 dials out to send a trap, it first dials the Primary Phone Number. If the call is unsuccess-
ful, it tries the Secondary Phone Number. Attempts between the two numbers continue until a call is estab-
lished and the trap is reported (or until each number’s maximum for redial attempts is reached). Refer to
Initializing String
The AT command entered in this field is used to initialize the modem. Normally, this field should be left at
the default setting (ATZ).
Dial String
The AT command entered in this field causes the modem to dial out. Normally, this field should be left at
the default setting (ATDT).
Maximum Redial Attempts
The MX2800 attempts to establish a call the number of times entered in this field. If a successful call is not
established after the final attempt, the MX2800 discards the trap messages.
Idle Timeout
After establishing a call and sending trap messages, the MX2800 remains online for the amount of seconds
entered in this field. If the field is set to 0, the unit hangs up as soon as the trap is sent.
61200290L1-1G
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Connection Timeout
The MX2800 waits for a connection for the number of seconds entered in this field. Timing begins as soon
as the dial command is issued. This field must be set for greater than 20 seconds.
Pause Between Calls
The MX2800 waits between redial attempts for the number of seconds entered in this field.
Dialout On Trap
This field is used to enable or disable the MX2800’s ability to dial out to report traps. Modem Mode
configured for VT-100 reports error conditions in plain ASCII with the following information:
• The Unit ID value programmed in the Equipment Identification portion of the System Management
• A trap code indicating the error condition
• A text description of the fault
• The date and time when the error was logged
When Modem Mode is configured for PPP or SLIP, the MX2800 logs into the PPP/SLIP host and reports
Answer on Ring
This option enables or disables the MX2800’s ability to accept incoming calls. If enabled, incoming calls
are automatically answered by the MX2800, allowing remote performance of management functions.
Modem Mode
This field is used to select the Modem port function for the desired application (VT-100, PPP, or SLIP).
The Modem port, located on the rear panel of the MX2800, provides a telephone line (POTS) for connec-
tion to the internal V.34 modem. This setting applies only if the Management Port is set to Modem. Refer
Modem Baud Rate
This option is used to set the maximum operating speed in bps of the Modem port:
• 1200
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 19200
• 38400
3-20
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Hangup
Selecting this option forces the MX2800 to end an established call.
Last Modem Response
This status field displays the last modem response to the MX2800. Possible responses are as follows:
• OK
• Connect
• Busy
• Error
• No Dialtone
• No Carrier
SNMP Management Options
SNMP State
Use this menu to Enable or Disable SNMP for the MX2800. When disabled, the MX2800 ignores all
incoming SNMP packets and does not transmit SNMP packets.
Trap IP Addresses
This field is used to enter up to five IP addresses of SNMP managers to which the MX2800 sends traps.
Trap Generation
Use this menu, see Figure 3-14, to designate which error conditions cause the unit to send trap messages.
61200290L1-1G
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Figure 3-14. Trap Generation Menu
Table 3-3. Trap Descriptions
Trap
If enabled, the unit issues a trap when...
Controller Traps
Protection Switch
Card Removed
Card Failure
The controller cards switch.
A controller card has been removed.
A controller card has failed.
Communication Fail
Max Switches
The controller cards can no longer communicate with each other.
The Max Switch Threshold is reached. For more information, refer to Maximum Switch
Power Supply Alarm Traps
Card Removed
Malfunction
The power supply card has been removed.
The power supply card is no longer working and the unit has switched to the backup
power supply or battery backup.
Card Failure
Power Low
The power supply card has failed.
The power supply’s output level is abnormally low.
Battery charger has lost its AC power source.
Bat. Backup Act
3-22
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Table 3-3. Trap Descriptions (Continued)
If enabled, the unit issues a trap when...
Trap
Battery Low
Battery backup has reached an energy point insufficient to supply the unit with power.
The power supply card is getting too hot.
Temperature High
Temperature Critical
The power supply card temperature is so high that it may suffer damage.
DS3 Alarm Traps (Near-End Active and Standby Cards)
LOS
OOF
AIS
The controller card has lost the network Rx signal.
The controller card detects a framing loss from the network.
The controller card is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network. AIS
alarms occur when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits. This indicates
that
The controller card is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network. This
alarm occurs when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits, indicating
there is a transmission fault located either at or upstream from the transmitting terminal.
RAI
The controller card is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a
signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bits (X1 and X2) are
set to zero.
IDLE
The controller card detects an idle sequence from the network.
The controller card’s transmitter has failed.
TX LOS
XCV
The controller card is receiving excessive code violations, exceeding the threshold set by
In/Out Test
The DS3 is going in and out of test (applies to the Active controller card only).
DS3 Alarm Traps (Far-End Active Cards)
LOS
OOF
AIS
The remote unit’s active controller card has lost the network Rx signal.
The remote unit’s active controller card detects a framing loss from the network.
The remote unit’s active controller card is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from
the network.
RAI
The remote unit’s active controller card is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm from the net-
work. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The
X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero.
IDLE
The remote unit’s active controller card detects an idle sequence from the network.
DS3 Eqpt Fail SA
The remote unit’s active controller card is receiving a service-affecting equipment failure
message from the network.
DS3 Eqpt Fail NSA
The remote unit’s active controller card is receiving a non-service-affecting equipment
failure message from the network.
61200290L1-1G
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Table 3-3. Trap Descriptions (Continued)
If enabled, the unit issues a trap when...
Trap
Comn Eqpt Fail NSA The remote unit’s active controller card is receiving a common equipment failure mes-
sage from the network.
DS2 Alarm Traps
OOF
AIS
The DS2 detects a framing loss from the network.
The DS2 is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network. AIS alarms occur
when the unit is receiving unframed all ones.
RAI
The DS2 is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a signal sent
back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bit is set to zero.
Local T1/E1 Alarm Traps
LOS
The unit has lost the Rx signal on a T1/E1.
The T1 is receiving all ones from the DS3 side of the network.
carrier side AIS
(CAIS)
loop side AIS (LAIS) The T1 is receiving all ones from the DSX-1 interface.
XCV
The unit is receiving excessive code violations across a T1/E1, exceeding the configured
T1/E1 Failure
In/Out Test
A T1/E1 has failed.
A T1/E1 is going in or out of test.
Far-End Alarms (available only in C-Bit Parity mode)
Multiple DS1 LOS
Single DS1 LOS
DS1 Eqpt Fail SA
DS1 Eqpt Fail NSA
The far-end equipment has lost multiple T1/E1 lines.
The far-end equipment has lost a single T1/E1.
A service-affecting equipment failure is being reported by the far-end.
A non-service-affecting equipment failure is being reported by the far-end.
MIB II Standard Alarm Traps
Cold Start
Link Up
The unit is first powered up.
The DS3 is up with no alarms.
Link Down
The DS3 is in alarm.
Authentication Fail-
ure
An attempt has been made by an unauthorized user to access the unit.
Read Community Name
This field is used to enter the authentication strings used for SNMP management. Match the MX2800 to
the SNMP manager for read privileges.
3-24
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Write Community Name
This field is used to enter the authentication strings used for SNMP management. Match the MX2800 to
the SNMP manager for write privileges.
Trap Community Name
This field is used to enter the identification string used for trap management. This string accompanies all
traps transmitted by the MX2800.
System Name
This value is equivalent to the sysName item defined in RFC1213. The value is an administratively-
assigned name for the managed node. By convention, this is the node's fully-qualified domain name.
Network Date/Time Option
The MX2800 is capable of having the date and time provisioned from a remote server using one of two
supported protocols: SNTP version 3 (per RFC1769) and Network Time (per RFC868).
Several options are available for provisioning this feature, all of which are accessible only via menus by
users with Admin-level privileges. These options reside in the System Management menu.
State
This option sets the mode or protocol used to retrieve the date and time from the server. Possible values are
Disabled, SNTP, and Net Time. When the State option is set to Disabled, the user should explicitly set the
date and time locally (via menus, TL1, or SNMP). If the State option is set to SNTP or Net Time, then the
product prevents any attempt to set the time locally. The default value is Disabled.
Server IP Address
This option sets the IP address of the server to be queried for the date and time.
Refresh Period
This option sets the length of time between queries to the server. The available values range are as follows:
• 1 minutes interval
• 5 minutes interval
• 10 minutes interval
• 15 minutes interval (default)
• 20 minutes interval
• 25 minutes interval
• 30 minutes interval
• 35 minutes interval
61200290L1-1G
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
• 40 minutes interval
• 45 minutes interval
• 50 minutes interval
• 55 minutes interval
• 60 minutes interval
DST Automatic Adjustment
This option sets automatic adjustment for North American daylight saving time. Available values are
Enabled and Disabled. The default value is Enabled. This automatic adjustment is performed only in
association with responses from the server. The automatic adjustment does not take place if the State
option is disabled and/or if the server cannot be contacted.
Local Time Zone
This option sets the time zone in which the MX2800 unit is located. Possible values consist of North
American time zones from Hawaii-Aleutian Standard Time to Atlantic Standard Time. The default value is
Eastern Standard Time.
NOTE
The MX2800 processes only the Transmit Timestamp value of all SNTP
response messages. Other constructs supported by the protocol (such as
root delay, root dispersion, authentication, etc.) are not processed by the
MX2800.
System Security
User Account Management
This option is used to enter up to 15 user accounts. Each user account is assigned a username, password,
and privilege level. Usernames and passwords are not case sensitive but must be 12 characters or less. Each
user account is assigned a privilege level to provide the option of limiting a user's access to the MX2800.
The four privilege levels are listed below.
Guest
A user with this read-only privilege level can view almost all menu items on the console interface menus
and can perform a limited number of TL1 commands, none of which can alter the product's configuration.
Interface
A user with write-access privilege level can configure items related to the network interface and T1/E1
interface but can not initiate loopbacks and view and/or alter several system-level items such as LAN
configurables.
3-26
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Test
A user with write-access privilege level can configure the network interface and T1/E1 interface and can
initiate loopbacks but may not view and/or alter several system-level items such as LAN configurables,
etc.
Admin
With Admin privilege level, all menu items can be viewed and/or altered. Only a user with an Admin user
account can alter the User Account Management information.
User accounts provide access to the MX2800 for console interface sessions and TL1 sessions. Table 3-4
on page 3-30 provides a summary of privileges.
NOTE
The Load Default Settings menu item that is located on the Configuration/
Utilities menu resets the User Account Management table back to the
factory default account adtran/adtran/admin.
RADIUS Authentication
The MX2800 is capable of communicating with a RADIUS server for authentication of menu users and
TL1 users. The RADIUS authentication support is implemented per RFC2865. User account information
in the onboard user database will remain intact when the MX2800 is upgraded to support authentication via
RADIUS.
Several options are available for provisioning RADIUS authentication features, all of which are accessible
only via menus and by users with Admin-level privileges.
RADIUS State
This option sets the RADIUS authentication capabilities as either Enabled or Disabled. The default value is
Disabled.
When the RADIUS State value is Enabled, the following behavior applies when a user enters a username
and password at the MX2800. The MX2800 first authenticates the username and password against the
local user database. If local authentication succeeds, then access is granted to the MX2800 with the privi-
lege level assigned for that account in the onboard database. Local authentication is considered successful
if both the username and password are authenticated, regardless of the privilege level (including Disabled).
If local authentication does not succeed, then the username and password are authenticated against the
RADIUS server. If the RADIUS authentication succeeds, then access to the MX2800 is granted with the
RADIUS Privilege Level set by the user. If the RADIUS authentication does not succeed, which includes
the case where the MX2800 does not receive a response from the server, then the user is denied access to
the MX2800.
Regardless of whether the RADIUS State option is Enabled or Disabled at the MX2800, each user account
that exists in the local user database may be assigned one of the defined privilege levels for the MX2800
(Disabled, Guest, Interface, Test, or Admin). Only a user with the Admin privilege level can access the
local database and the RADIUS options.
61200290L1-1G
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Usernames and passwords stored in the local user database are each limited to 11 ASCII characters.
Usernames and passwords authenticated via RADIUS may each have up to 63 ASCII characters.
When RADIUS authentication is disabled, safeguards are in place that will prevent an Admin-level user
from deleting all Admin-level accounts in the onboard user database. When RADIUS authentication is
enabled, an Admin-level user who was authenticated through RADIUS will be allowed to delete all of the
onboard accounts. This will be allowed to avoid some potential security concerns.
Safeguards will exist that will prevent certain combinations of options involving RADIUS and the local
user database that would effectively remove all means of accessing the MX2800 with Admin privileges.
The recovery mechanism for gaining access via the challenge password (ADTRANPLEASEHELP) is
supported regardless of whether the RADIUS authentication option is enabled or disabled. When a user
enters this password, the MX2800 issues a unique challenge sequence that requires a response provided by
ADTRAN Tech Support for access to the unit.
Local user accounts and passwords for the MX2800 are not case-sensitive. However, case is preserved for
both username and password when authenticating through RADIUS. The TL1 input message specification
limits the characters that may be sent as part of a TL1 command, unless the string is enclosed in double
quotes. This is important when RADIUS authentication is used for authenticating TL1 sessions. Passwords
or usernames with special characters must be placed in double quotes in the ACT-USER command. If
double quotes appear inside the TL1 username or password, each double quote character must be immedi-
ately preceded by the backslash character to avoid confusion with the double quotes surrounding the
username or password.
The MX2800 supports Challenge response messages from the RADIUS server regardless of whether the
login attempt is made via menus or TL1. If a Challenge response is received from the server, then the user
is prompted for additional information. The nature of this additional information is application-dependent.
When the Challenge response is received during an attempt to log in via TL1, then a PLNA TL1 response
is returned to the user and the Challenge message is provided in the TL1 comment field.
Server IP Address
This option sets the IP address of the server to be queried for authentication. The default value is a null IP
address. One IP address is supported.
UDP Port
This option sets the UDP port of the server. The default value is 1812.
Privilege Level
This option sets a single privilege level that applies for all users that are granted access via remote authen-
tication. The possible values are Disabled, Guest, Interface, Test, and Admin. The default value is Guest.
Refer to the appropriate MX2800 documentation for explanations of these privilege levels.
Shared Secret Visibility
This option sets the visibility of the Shared Secret value as displayed in the provisioning menu for
RADIUS authentication options. The possible values are Visible and Invisible. When this option is set to
Invisible, the Shared Secret value is masked with asterisk characters. The default value is Invisible.
3-28
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Shared Secret
This option sets the shared secret that is used during the process of authenticating via the RADIUS server.
This value is a case-sensitive ASCII character string that has a maximum length of 63 ASCII characters.
The default value is a null string.
Response Timeout
This option sets the number of seconds the MX2800 will wait for a response before retransmitting the
request.
Maximum Retries
This option sets the maximum number of retransmissions of an authentication request that the MX2800
will attempt in the absence of a response from the server.
61200290L1-1G
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Table 3-4. Console Menu User Privileges
Privilege level(s) under which a user may
alter (and in some cases, view) this item
Console Menu Item
Guest
Interface
Test
Admin
Status Menu
Acknowledge alarms
X
X
X
Statistics Menus
Clear statistics (for all Statistics menus)
Reset alarm log
X
X
X
X
X
X
Configuration – Network Interface Menu
DS3 framing mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DS3 line length (L1 Controller Card only)
DS3 timing
DS3 loopback detection
DS3 XCV threshold
Active controller
Network protection
DS3 max switch threshold
DS3 min switching period
Loopback time out
Shutdown stand-by controller
Reset stand-by controller
DS2 #1-7 mode (T1 or E1)
Configuration – T1/E1 Interface Menu
T1/E1 state
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
T1/E1 line coding
T1/E1 line length
T1/E1 loopback detection
T1/E1 circuit protection
T1/E1 protection threshold
T1/E1 line identification
3-30
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Table 3-4. Console Menu User Privileges (Continued)
Privilege level(s) under which a user may
alter (and in some cases, view) this item
Console Menu Item
Guest
Interface
Test
Admin
T1/E1 XCV threshold
Configuration – System Management Menu
Local IP address
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Gateway IP address
Subnet mask
Modem remote IP address (controller with modem)
Management port
Forward IP to remote DS3
DS3 remote IP address
Dial-up Option menu (controller with modem)
DS3 IP MTU
System Name
SNMP Management Option menu
Network Date/Time Option menu
User Account Management menu
Terminal time out
IP security
IP hosts
Date
Time
Alarm Relay Configuration menu
Equipment ID menu
Syslog Setup menu
Save-on-logout
X
X
X
X
Craft baud rate
Telnet Client menu
IP Address
X
61200290L1-1G
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Table 3-4. Console Menu User Privileges (Continued)
Privilege level(s) under which a user may
alter (and in some cases, view) this item
Console Menu Item
Guest
Interface
Test
Admin
TCP Port
X
X
Connect
Configuration – Utilities Menu
Load default settings
Update flash software
Configuration transfer
System reset
X
X
X
X
Configuration – Protection Switching Menu
Active controller
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Max switch threshold
Min switching period
Loopback Menu
T1/E1 loopbacks
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DS2 loopbacks
DS3 loopbacks
Reset all tests
Clear BERR
Save Configuration & Alarm Log
Logout
X
X
X
X
“X” denotes a privilege level that allows execution of the associated menu item.
3-32
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Terminal Time Out
Set the amount of time the terminal or Telnet session remains inactive before automatically closing the
session, requiring the user to log in again. Options include the following:
• Disabled
• 1 min.
• 5 min.
• 15 min.
• 60 min.
• 1 day.
IP Security
Enable or disable the IP Security option. If IP Security is set to Enabled, the unit accepts management
commands and Telnet sessions from the IP addresses entered into the IP Hosts fields.
IP Hosts
Enter up to 16 IP addresses of management stations from which the unit should accept management
commands. These addresses are applicable only if IP Security is Enabled.
Date and Time
Enter date and time information. Enter the month, date, and year separated by forward slashes (02/23/04).
Enter the time in military time separated by colons (13:15:25).
Miscellaneous
The Miscellaneous option of the System management menu sets the fields and values for the
• Alarm Relay Configuration
• Equipment Identification
• Syslog Setup
• Auto Save
• Craft baud rate
Alarm Relay Configuration
This menu enables and disables audible and visible alarms for specific error conditions. See Figure 3-15.
61200290L1-1G
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Figure 3-15. Alarm Relay Configuration Menu
Table 3-5. Types of Alarms in Alarm Relay Configuration
Alarm
Level
Description
DS3 Alarms
RAI
Critical
The unit is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm from the network. This
alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit.
The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero.
AIS
Critical
The unit is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm from the network. This alarm
occurs when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits,
indicating the fault lies at or upstream from the transmitting source.
LOS
LOF
XCV
Critical
The unit has lost the network Rx signal.
Critical
The unit detects a framing loss from the network.
Noncritical
The controller card is receiving code violations in excess of the user
TLOS
Critical
The controller card transmitter has failed.
DS2 Alarms
RAI
Noncritical
The unit is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm from the network across a
DS2. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed trans-
mit circuit. The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero.
AIS
Noncritical
The unit is receiving unframed all ones across a DS2.
3-34
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Table 3-5. Types of Alarms in Alarm Relay Configuration (Continued)
Alarm
Level
Description
LOF
Noncritical
The unit detects a framing loss from the network across a DS2.
System Alarms
1
Controller Card A/B
Fail
Critical
Controller Card A/B has failed.
Protection Switch
Critical
The unit detects a Controller Card protection switch. Data is routed from
the primary to stand-by card.
Communication Fail
Noncritical
The Controller Cards can no longer communicate.
2
T1/E1 Alarms
LOS
Noncritical
Noncritical
The unit has lost the receive signal on a T1/E1.
XCV
The controller card is receiving code violations in excess of the user
Carrier Side AIS
(CAIS)
Noncritical
The T1 is receiving all ones from the DS3 side of the network.
The T1 is receiving all ones from the DSX-1 interface.
Loop Side AIS (LAIS) Noncritical
Power Supply Alarms
Malfunction
Noncritical
Power supply card is no longer working. The unit has switched to the
backup power supply or battery backup.
Power Low
Noncritical
Noncritical
Noncritical
Noncritical
Power supply’s output level is abnormally low.
Power supply card does not detect power input.
Battery charger has lost its AC power source.
Power Fail
Bat. Backup Act
Battery Low
Battery backup has reached an energy point insufficient to supply the
unit with power.
Temperature High
Noncritical
Noncritical
Power supply card temperature is above normal.
Temperature Critical
Power supply card temperature is so high that it may suffer damage.
1. This is a critical alarm only when Inactive Card is not installed or is not working.
2. T1/E1 alarms are cleared when the T1/E1 is disabled or set to Auto Enable after receiving an alarm.
Equipment Identification
These fields are used to store information that identifies the unit. See Figure 3-16 on page 3-36. Informa-
tion provided for the far-end is read-only. Local information is read/write from this menu.
61200290L1-1G
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Figure 3-16. Equipment Identification Menu
Unit ID
This option provides a user-configurable text string for the name of the MX2800. This name can help
distinguish between different installations. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field.
This information is locally stored and displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the MX2800 terminal
screens. This identifier is used as the system’s TID for TL1.
Facility ID
The Facility ID Code supports 38 alphanumeric characters and provides user-configurable text strings to
identify the MX2800 over the network. This information is transmitted over the DS3 on the equipment ID
channel.
Location ID
The Location ID Code supports 10 alphanumeric characters and provides user-configurable text strings to
identify the MX2800 over the network.
Frame ID
The Frame ID Code supports 10 alphanumeric characters and provides user-configurable text strings to
identify the MX2800 over the network.
Unit Code
The Unit Code supports 6 alphanumeric characters and provides user-configurable text strings to identify
the MX2800 over the network.
3-36
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Equipment Codes
The Equipment Code supports 10 alpha-numeric characters and provides user-configurable text strings to
identify the MX2800 over the network.
Syslog Setup
These selections include Transmission, Host IP Address, Severity Level, and Host Facility.
Transmission
This option enables or disables the transmission of log events to the external Syslog server. The host IP
address must be defined first.
Host IP Address
This option specifies the IP address of the external server that is running the Syslog host daemon.
Severity Level
This option specifies the lowest level of severity that causes messages to be logged to the Syslog server.
The levels are listed in Table 3-6 in order of decreasing severity. Any message at or above a selected sever-
ity level will be logged if a transmission is enabled.
Table 3-6. Syslog Severity Levels
Level
Description
Emergency
Alert
The system is unusable.
An action must be taken immediately.
Shows critical conditions.
Critical
Error
Shows error conditions.
Warning
Notice
Info
Shows warning conditions.
Shows normal but significant conditions.
Shows informational messages.
Shows a debug-level message.
Debug
Host Facility
This option specifies the facility destination of log events. Facilities are located on the host and are
managed by the Syslog host daemon running on either a UNIX machine or a PC. Options include Local 0-
7.
61200290L1-1G
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Auto Save
Enable this function to save the configuration every five minutes and upon logout. Disable this option if
the configuration is not to be saved. The configuration may be saved manually from the Configuration
menu.
Craft Baud Rate
This value sets the rate at AUTO, 9600, 19200, 38400, and 57600 baud rate.
5. UTILITIES
The System Utilities menu, see Figure 3-17, is used to view MX2800 system information for both control-
ler cards:
• Self-test results
• Revert to default configuration settings
• Flash-load a new version of software
• Transfer configuration information to and from a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server
• Reset the system
Figure 3-17. System Utilities Menu
3-38
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
Table 3-7. Self-Test Results
Then...
If the self test results are...
PASS
The self-test was successful and the unit is ready to use.
BAD RAM DATA
Contact ADTRAN Technical Support. For more information, refer to
BAD RAM ADDRESS
BAD CODE CHECKSUM
BAD BOOT SECTOR
IOX PROGRAM FAILURE
AFE PROGRAM FAILURE
MODEM FAILURE
ETHERNET FAILURE
DS3 FAILURE
DSX FAILURE
CONFIGURATION CORRUPT
Select Save Configuration from the Configuration menu. If the condition
persists, contact ADTRAN Technical Support.
Loading Default Settings
Select Load Default Settings from the Utilities menu. Three options are available for loading default
settings.
Load Default Settings Other Than System Management
This option defaults all Network and T1/E1 interfaces but does not change management-related options.
CAUTION
Loading the default settings will set the T1/E1 state of all DS1 ports to
Auto Enable.
Load System Management Default Settings
This option defaults all management-related settings but does not default settings for Network and T1/E1
interfaces.
CAUTION
Loading the default settings will set the T1/E1 state of all DS1 ports to
Auto Enable. The User Account Management table is also reset to default.
61200290L1-1G
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Load All Default Settings
This option defaults all settings for the unit. Once the settings have been successfully retrieved, Command
Acceptedwill appear at the bottom of the screen
CAUTION
The User Account Management table is also reset to default.
Updating Software
Select Update Flash Software from the Utilities menu to update software, using either XModem protocol
or TFTP.
NOTE
Before beginning update of Flash software, disable the Auto Save feature
of the MX2800. From the Configuration menu, choose System
Management, then select Auto Save and toggle until it is set to Disable.
Update Via XModem
Updating the Flash Software via XModem requires that a VT100 terminal menu session be active through
the units craft port. To update the software via XModem, follow these steps:
1. From the MX2800 Main Menu, select Configuration, then Utilities, then Update Flash Software, and
then Update via XModem.
2. Once it has been determined where the new binary file is located, select Start to begin the transfer.
3. Once Start has been selected, start the XModem transfer from the terminal menu program that is being
used by selecting or typing the file path for the location of the new binary file. Refer to the appropriate
documentation for the terminal emulator to begin XModem transfer.
4. After the binary file has been selected, the XModem transfer will begin. To cancel a transfer in
progress, press CTRL+X three times. The ACT LED on the active card is solid amber for the duration of
XModem transfer. The ACT LED on the standby card is flashing green.
5. If updating a unit with redundant controller cards, the active controller will begin uploading the new
code to the standby controller after the XModem transfer has completed and the unit has successfully
loaded and programmed the new software into its Flash memory. If the unit does not have redundant
6. While the standby card is having code uploaded, the ACT LED on the standby card will be solid
amber. After the code has finished uploading to the standby card, the card will reset itself and begin
running the new code.
3-40
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
CAUTION
The standby card must remain in place until the upload process is
complete and the ACT LED is no longer solid amber and returns to
flashing green. Removing the standby card during the uploading process
will corrupt the software.
7. The system must be manually reset after downloading new software for the active controller card to
begin running the new code. From the Utilities menu, select System Reset, then select either
Immediate Reset to immediately reset the system or Schedule Reset Time to set a time for the system
to reset. Once the system has been reset, the new software will be running.
NOTE
This function is available only when updating the software through the
craft port.
Update Via TFTP Server
Updating the FLASH Software via TFTP Server requires that the IP address and file name of file to be
downloaded be known. To update the software via TFTP, follow the steps below:
1. Select Update via TFTP Server from the Utilities menu. A new menu displays, allowing the IP address
and file name of the file to be downloaded to the unit to be entered. Once this information is entered,
select Start/Stop Transfer.
2. After the binary file is selected, the TFTP transfer will begin. To cancel a transfer in progress, press
CTRL+X three times. The ACT LED on the active card is solid amber for the duration of TFTP transfer.
The ACT LED on the standby card is blinking green.
3. If updating a unit with redundant controller cards, the active controller begins uploading the new code
to the standby controller after the XModem transfer has completed; and the unit has successfully
loaded and programmed the new software into its FLASH memory. If the unit does not have redundant
4. While the standby card is having code uploaded, the ACT LED on the standby card will be solid
amber. After the code has finished uploading to the standby card, the card will reset itself and begin
running the new code.
CAUTION
The standby card must remain in place until the upload process is
complete, and the ACT LED is no longer solid amber. Removing the
standby card during the uploading process will corrupt the software.
5. The system must be manually reset after downloading new software for the active controller card to
begin running the new code. From the Utilities menu, select System Reset. Then select either
61200290L1-1G
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Immediate Reset to immediately reset the system or Schedule Reset Time to set a time for the system
to reset. Once the system has been reset, the new software will be running.
NOTE
After new software has been downloaded to the MX2800 system, a
condition known as a “software version mismatch” exists on the active
card. The currently running software version is different from the version
of the new software that was just programmed into the card's nonvolatile
memory. This condition occurs because a manual card reset is necessary
for the card to begin running the new software. If the software version
being run by the system before the upgrade began was 2.00 or higher, this
mismatch will be indicated by a TL1 standing condition (condition code
PROGFLT) and a repeating message displayed at the bottom of all menu
screens. This is not a service-affecting condition; however, it is recom-
mended that the download process be completed by resetting the active
card as soon as it is practical. Doing so assures that all improvements in
the new software are fully available.
Configuration Transfer
Select Config Transfer from the Utilities menu to transfer files to and from a TFTP server. The Config
Transfer option is used to save the MX2800 configuration as a backup file, ensuring that the same configu-
ration can be used with multiple MX2800 units. Only one configuration transfer session (upload or
download) can be active at a time.
NOTE
Before using Config Transfer, the MX2800 should have a valid IP
address, subnet mask, and default gateway (if required) and should be
connected to an Ethernet network.
Saving to a TFTP Server
To save current configuration information to a TFTP server, follow the steps listed below:
1. Set the Server IP Address field to the IP address of the machine running the TFTP server program.
If the ADTRAN TFTP server is being used, the IP address displays in the Server IP Address field. For
other TFTP servers, refer to the appropriate documentation.
2. Change the TFTP Server Filename to a unique filename. This will be the name of the configuration file
saved to the remote server.
3-42
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Configuration, Section 3
NOTE
Some TFTP servers constrain the format of the filename, depending on
the operating system of the server. For example, a TFTP server running
on a PC under Windows 3.1 may permit only 8.3 format filenames (8
characters, period, and three extension characters).
3. Select Save Config Remotely.
Retrieving from a TFTP Server
To retrieve current configuration information from a TFTP server, follow the steps listed below:
1. Set the Server IP Address field to the IP address of the machine running the TFTP server program.
If the ADTRAN TFTP server is being used, the IP address displays in the Server IP Address field. For
other TFTP servers, please refer to the appropriate documentation.
2. Change the TFTP Server File Name to a unique filename, including the complete path. This will be the
name of the configuration file retrieved from the remote server.
CAUTION
Configuration changes will not be implemented until all Telnet sessions
are closed. Loading a new configuration may disrupt data traffic.
3. Select Load and Use Config.
NOTE
IP address and management port settings remain unchanged when a
configurative is retrieved from a TFTP server.
Resetting the System
The system must be manually reset after downloading new software. When the unit has successfully
loaded and programmed the new software into its FLASH memory, it will begin uploading the code to the
standby controller. This will be indicated on the menu and the ACT LED on the standby card will display
solid yellow.
CAUTION
The standby card must remain in place until the process is complete and
the ACT LED is no longer solid yellow. Removing the standby card
during the uploading process will corrupt the software.
61200290L1-1G
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3, Configuration
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Once the upload is complete, the standby card will self-reset and begin running the new code. However,
the active card does not reset automatically. The unit must be reset through the Immediate Reset or Sched-
ule Reset Time functions.
6. SAVE CONFIGURATION AND ALARM LOG
Commits the current configuration and alarm log to nonvolatile memory. If this option is not selected after
making changes to the configuration, the unit reverts to its previous configuration when powered down.
When the selection is made, a response is displayed on the Save Configuration and Alarm menu. See
Figure 3-18. Indication of a Saved Configuration and Alarm Log
3-44
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 4, STATUS
Section 4
Status
1. INTRODUCTION
View MX2800 status information by selecting Status from the Main Menu. The information for the DS3,
Figure 4-1. Status Menu
2. DS3 STATE
This field displays the current state of the DS3. The following subsections describe the DS3 status fields in
detail.
Rx Framing
This field shows the network framing type (C-Bit or M13).
61200290L1-1G
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4, Status
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
State
This field displays the current condition of the network. Possible conditions are listed in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1. Network State Conditions
Condition
Description
Normal
Alarm
The MX2800 is ready to pass data.
The unit is currently receiving an alarm indication. For alarm types, refer to the
Alarm subsection.
In Test
on the test type.
Alarm
This field displays the current alarm condition of the MX2800. Possible conditions are given in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2. Alarm Conditions
Condition
Description
Normal
RAI
No alarms are currently being received.
The unit is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a sig-
nal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bits (X1 and X2)
are set to zero.
LOS
AIS
The unit has lost the Rx signal.
The unit is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network. AIS alarms
occur when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits, indicating that
there is a transmission fault located either at or upstream from the transmitting ter-
minal.
LOF
The unit detects a framing loss from the network.
XCV
The unit is receiving excessive code violations from the network, exceeding the
threshold set by the user. For more information, refer to
TLOS
Idle
The transmitter has failed.
The unit detects an idle sequence from the network.
4-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Status, Section 4
Remote
This field indicates the current state of the remote MX2800 (available with C-Bit framing only). Possible
Table 4-3. Remote Alarm Conditions
Condition
Description
Normal
RAI
The far-end MX2800 is not reporting any alarm conditions.
The far-end unit is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm
is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bits (X1
and X2) are set to zero.
LOS
AIS
The far-end unit has lost the Rx signal.
The far-end unit is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network. AIS
alarms occur when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits, indicat-
ing that there is a transmission fault located either at or upstream from the
transmitting terminal.
LOF
The far-end unit detects a framing loss from the network.
Idle
The far-end unit detects an idle sequence from the network.
DS3 Eqpt Fail (SA)
DS3 Eqpt Fail (NSA)
The far-end unit or network is reporting a service-affecting DS3 equipment failure.
The far-end unit or network is reporting a non-service-affecting DS3 equipment
failure.
Common Eqpt Fail (NSA)
The far-end unit or network is reporting a non-service-affecting common
equipment failure.
Multiple DS1 LOS
Single DS1 LOS
DS1 Eqpt Fail (SA)
DS1 Eqpt Fail (NSA)
Unknown
The far-end unit is experiencing a loss of signal on multiple DS1s.
The far-end unit is experiencing a loss of signal on a single DS1.
The far-end unit is experiencing a service-affecting DS1 equipment failure.
The far-end unit is experiencing a non-service-affecting DS1 equipment failure.
The unit is unable to discern the status of the far-end unit. (Normal for M13
framing.)
61200290L1-1G
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4, Status
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
3. POWER SUPPLY STATE
This field indicates which types of power supplies are installed (AC or DC) in Card A and Card B and
Table 4-4. Power Supply Conditions
Condition
Description
Normal
The power supply is fully operational.
Error
The controller card cannot communicate with the power supply.
The power supply output level is abnormally low.
Power Low
Power Fail
Charger Fail
Battery Low
Temp High
Temp Critical
The power supply input power is lost.
The battery backup charger has failed or has lost its AC input.
The battery backup has reached an insufficient energy level to power the unit.
The power supply card temperature is abnormally high.
The power supply card temperature is so high that it is approaching shut off.
4. SYSTEM STATE
These fields display information regarding the two controller cards. The following sections describe the
system state fields in detail.
Alarm
This field displays what type (if any) of system alarm is currently recognized by the unit. The condition is
displayed until it clears up, with the exception of the Switched condition (which is cleared manually) and
the Excessive Switches (which is cleared when Protection Switch alarms counts are cleared). For more
To clear the Switched condition, select Acknowledge Alarms (ACO) or push the ACO button on the front
Table 4-5. System State Alarm Types
Condition
Description
Supply Failure
Card Failure
A power supply card has failed.
A controller card is not passing data.
Excessive Switches
The Max Switching Threshold has been exceeded. Refer to Maximum Switch
Switched
A card switch has occurred.
4-4
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Status, Section 4
Card A/Card B
These fields display the current state of the two controller cards. Possible states for the controller cards are
Table 4-6. Controller Card States
Condition
Description
Not Installed
Standby
Active
No controller card is installed in this slot.
The controller card is ready to pass data but is currently acting as a backup card.
The controller card is acting as the primary card.
Failure
The controller card has failed and needs to be replaced.
Protection
This field lists the type of protection mode currently active. Possible states are listed in Table 4-7.
Table 4-7. Protection Types
Condition
Description
Network
Both controller cards are installed and everything is healthy. The unit is in full
network protection mode.
Circuit
None
Unit is in Circuit Protection Mode and everything is healthy,
or
unit is in network protection mode and a failure is present on the network.
One controller card is installed,
or
the unit is in Circuit Protection Mode, and the secondary card has failed.
NOTE
For more information on the various types of Protection Modes, refer to
Card Comm
This field displays the current state of the communication link between the two controller cards.
• OK indicates that the cards are communicating
• Failure indicates that the cards are not able to communicate with each other
• If there is only one card installed, Non-Redundant is displayed
61200290L1-1G
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4, Status
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
5. DS2 STATE
This field displays the current state of each of the seven DS2s. Possible states are listed in Table 4-8.
Table 4-8. DS2 States
Condition
Description
OK
The DS2 is not receiving alarms.
LOF
RAI
The unit detects framing loss across the DS2.
The unit is receiving an RAI (yellow) alarm across the DS2. This alarm is a signal
sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bit is set to zero.
AIS
The unit is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network across the
DS2. AIS alarms occur when the unit receives unframed all ones.
6. T1/E1 STATE
This field displays the current state of the individual T1s or E1s. Possible states are listed in Table 4-9.
Table 4-9. T1/E1 States
Condition
Description
OK
The T1/E1 is ready to pass data.
LOS
XCV
The unit has lost the Rx signal on the T1/E1.
The unit is receiving excessive code violations across the T1/E1, exceeding the
TST
The T1/E1 is currently in test mode.
HOT
LAIS
CAIS
The T1/E1 transceiver temperature is too high.
The T1 is receiving all ones from the DSX-1 interface.
The T1 is receiving all ones from the DS3 side of the network.
NOTE
A DS2 can be divided into either three E1s or four T1s. Therefore, when
dealing with an E1 configuration, some of the fields in the T1/E1 State
menus do not apply (and display nothing).
7. ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS (ACO)
This selection is used to remotely turn off an active alarm. It is the software equivalent of the ACO button
4-6
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 5, STATISTICS
Section 5
Statistics
1. INTRODUCTION
To access Statistics menu, select Statistics from the Main Menu. See Figure 5-1. Alarm information and
performance parameters are available for both the near and far ends of the network. Information is also
given for the individual DS2s and T1/E1 lines.
2. VIEWING STATISTICAL INFORMATION
Statistical information is given in screens based on these time periods:
• The current 15-minute interval
• A 24-hour history (divided into 96 15-minute intervals)
• The totals for the previous 24 hours
• A cumulative alarm count is given (this count continues indefinitely until reset by the user)
Figure 5-1. Statistics Menu
61200290L1-1G
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5, Statistics
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
DS3 Statistics
The DS3 Statistics menu, see Figure 5-2, provides submenus for alarm history and performance parame-
ters.
Figure 5-2. DS3 Statistics Menu
24 Hour Alarm History
The MX2800 keeps track of alarms for both the near and far ends of the network. View alarm history infor-
mation in one of the three time period selections, or view a cumulative alarm count. Information in these
fields is for the given time period since the last reset. The cumulative alarm count continues indefinitely
until Clear All DS3 Alarm Counts is selected. See Table 5-1 for a list of alarm counts. See Figure 5-3 on
Table 5-1. Alarm Counts
Condition
Description
LOS
LOF
AIS
Number of times the unit has lost the receive signal.
Number of times the unit has detected a loss of framing from the network.
Number of times the unit has received an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the net-
work. AIS alarms occur when consecutive 1010s are received in the information
bits. This indicates that there is a transmission fault located either at or upstream
from the transmitting terminal.
RAI
Number of times the unit has received an RAI (yellow) alarm from the network.
This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The
X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero.
5-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Statistics, Section 5
Table 5-1. Alarm Counts (Continued)
Description
Condition
IDLE
Number of times the unit has detected an idle sequence from the network.
NOTE
The count given reflects the number of times the alarm or state has
occurred rather than the number of seconds the alarm was active.
Figure 5-3. DS3 Current 15 Minute Alarm Count Screen
61200290L1-1G
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5, Statistics
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Figure 5-4. DS3 24-Hour Alarm History Screen
NOTE
When a > or < symbol appears in the upper corner of the screen, use the
right and left arrow keys on the keyboard to scroll right or left to view
Performance Parameters
View performance parameter information for the network in one of the three time period selections. Infor-
mation in these fields is for the given time period since the last reset. When viewing the 24-hour history
statistics screen, use the left and right arrow keys to scroll through all 96 15-minute intervals. See Figure
parameter screens.
Descriptions of the fields in each screen follow.
5-4
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5, Statistics
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
NOTE
When an UP or DOWN indicator appears in the corner of the screen, use
the up and down arrow keys on the keyboard to scroll the information.
Figure 5-6. DS3 Performance Parameters (24 Hour History)
5-6
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Statistics, Section 5
Figure 5-7. DS3 Performance Parameters (Totals)
Interval starting at:
This field is the beginning of the 15-minute interval. This field is displayed only in the 24-hour history
screen, which gives information for the previous 24 hours divided into 15-minute intervals, as shown in
61200290L1-1G
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5, Statistics
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Unavailable Seconds (UAS)
This field is the time in seconds that the network port has been unavailable for data delivery. The T3 link is
down or in test or the signaling state is down.
Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS)
This field indicates the number of seconds with one or more out-of-frame defects or a detected incoming
AIS.
Line Coding Violation (LCV)
This field is the number of bipolar violations (BPVs) and excessive zeros (EXZs) that have occurred.
Line Errored Seconds (LES)
This field is the number of seconds in which one or more CVs or one or more LOS defects occurred.
P-Bit Errored Seconds (PES)
This field indicates the number of seconds with one or more P-Bit Coding Violations (PCVs), one or more
out-of-frame defects, or a detected incoming AIS. This count is not incremented when UASs are counted.
P-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (PSES)
This field is the number of seconds with 44 or more PCVs, one or more out-of-frame defects, or a detected
incoming AIS. This count is not incremented when UASs are counted.
P-Bit Coding Violations (PCV)
This field is the number of coding violation (CV) error events that have occurred.
C-Bit Code Violations (CCV)
In C-Bit parity mode, this is a count of coding violations reported via the C-Bits or the number of C-Bit
parity errors that have occurred.
C-Bit Errored Seconds (CES)
This is the number of seconds with one or more CCVs, one or more out-of-frame defects, or a detected
incoming AIS. This count is not incremented when UASs are counted.
C-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (CSES)
This is the number of seconds with 44 or more CCVs, one or more out-of-frame defects, or a detected
incoming AIS. This count is not incremented when UASs are counted.
F-Bit Errors (FBE)
This is the number of times an F-bit framing error has occurred.
5-8
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Statistics, Section 5
Far End Block Error (FEBE)
This field indicates the number of times the far-end unit has received a C-parity or framing error.
Clear All Local DS3 Statistics/Refresh All Remote Statistics
Use this option to clear or refresh all current information. These selections affect all statistical information,
not just the displayed screen. When viewing the 24-Hour History screen, press the DOWN arrow key to
access this selection.
DS2 Statistics
24-Hour Alarm History
The MX2800 keeps track of RAI, OOF, and AIS alarms for each of the seven DS2s. View alarm history
information in one of the three time period selections, or view a cumulative alarm count. Information in
these fields is for the given time period since the last reset. The cumulative alarm count continues indefi-
nitely until Clear All DS2 Alarm Counts is selected. When viewing the 24-Hour History menus, use the UP
and DOWN arrow keys to view all three alarm counts (RAI, OOF, and AIS). See Figure 5-8 and Figure 5-9
Figure 5-8. DS2 Current 15 Minute Alarm Count Screen
61200290L1-1G
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Statistics, Section 5
Performance Parameters
The performance parameters screen displays a count of parity bit errors and frame bit errors for the seven
DS2s. View this information in any of the three time period selections. Information in these fields is for the
given time period since the last reset. When viewing the 24-hour history statistics screen, use the LEFT and
RIGHT arrow keys to scroll through all 96 15-minute intervals; use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll
between the PBERR (parity bit error) and FBERR (frame bit error) menus. See Figure 5-10 and Figure 5-
11.
Figure 5-10. DS2 Performance Parameters (Current 15 Minutes)
61200290L1-1G
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Statistics, Section 5
T1/E1 Statistics
The MX2800 keeps track of the following statistics for each of the T1s and E1s:
• Loss of Signal Alarms
• Line Coding Violations
• AIS Loop Alarms
• AIS Carrier Alarms
• Errored Seconds
• Severely Errored Seconds
See Figure 5-12. View this information in one of the three time period selections, or view a cumulative
alarm count. Information in these fields is for the given time period since the last reset. The cumulative
alarm count continues indefinitely until Clear All T1/E1 Alarm Counts, located in each field, is selected.
Performance parameters that are documented for the T1s and E1s are
• Errored Seconds
• Severely Errored Seconds
• Severely Errored Framing Seconds
• Unavailable Seconds
• Degraded Minutes
The current interval, past 24-hours in 15-minute intervals, and 24-hour totals for each of these may be
viewed.
Figure 5-12. T1/E1 Port Local Statistics Menu
61200290L1-1G
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5, Statistics
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
3. PROTECTION SWITCH STATISTICS
This menu provides statistics regarding protection switches. The number of protection switches that occur
Figure 5-13. Protection Switch Statistics Menu
Performance Parameters
View performance parameter information for the network in one of the three time period selections. Infor-
mation in these fields is for the given time period since the last reset. When viewing the 24-Hour History
statistics screen, use the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys to scroll through all 96 15-minute intervals. Clearing
protection switch alarm counts will clear the Excessive Switch State, if active.
Alarm Log
This menu provides a list of the last 200 alarms that have occurred on the MX2800. When the alarm log
becomes full, new alarms replace the oldest alarms in a first-in, first-out sequence.
The alarm log is periodically stored in nonvolatile memory. Once every minute, if an alarm has been
recorded or if the alarm log has been reset since the last time it was saved, then the alarm log and system
configuration are saved to nonvolatile memory. Both the alarm log and system configuration are saved
manually when the user executes the Save Configuration & Alarm Log menu function in the Configuration
menu. Each time the system powers up, the alarm log is retrieved from non-volatile memory.
A Reset Alarm Log function is accessible from the alarm log menu. This option clears the alarm log. See
5-14
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5, Statistics
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
This page is intentionally blank.
5-16
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 6, LOOPBACKS
Section 6
Loopbacks
1. INTRODUCTION
menu. To initiate a loopback, select Loopback Menu.
To locate descriptions of the types of loopback tests that are available, find T1/E1, DS2, or DS3 Loopback
descriptions. Next, select by number the type of loopback for a description.
Descriptions and testing diagrams of the loopback tests are provided in the following subsections:
Figure 6-1. Loopback Menu
61200290L1-1G
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6, Loopbacks
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
2. T1/E1 LOOPBACKS
initiating a T1/E1 loopback, select the facility number (1-28). A loopback menu for the facility displays a
menu of nine types of loopbacks. See Figure 6-2. Select Data Mode to end a loopback test in progress.
Figure 6-2. Loopback Control Menu
Data Mode
Selecting the Data Mode from the Loopback Control menu ends any loopback test in progress.
Tributary
A Tributary loopback loops the selected T1/E1 back to the network (DS3). The T1/E1 is demultiplexed
through the M23 and M12/G.747 demultiplexers, looped back, and multiplexed back up through the M12/
G.747 and M23 multiplexers. During this loopback, all network receive data is passed to the DSX-1/E1
transmitters, but all data received by the DSX-1/E1 loop side is ignored and substituted with the network
6-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Loopbacks, Section 6
CODEC
(1 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(1 of 28)
F
R
A
M
E
R
M12/G.747
MUX/DMUX
(1 of 7)
D
S
2
F
R
D
DSX-3
LIU
M23
MUX/DMUX
A
M
E
S
3
R
CODEC
(28 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(28 of 28)
Figure 6-3. Tributary Loopback Test
Analog Network
An Analog Network loopback test loops the selected T1/E1 back to the network (DS3). The T1/E1 is
completely demultiplexed, looped back at the T1/E1 line interface unit (LIU), through the LIU drivers and
receivers, and multiplexed back onto the DS3 network stream. See Figure 6-4 for an illustration of this
test.
CODEC
(1 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(1 of 28)
F
R
A
M
E
R
M12/G.747
MUX/DMUX
(1 of 7)
D
S
2
F
R
A
M
E
R
D
S
3
DSX-3
LIU
M23
MUX/DMUX
CODEC
(28 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(28 of 28)
Figure 6-4. Analog Network Loopback
Digital Line/Net
A Digital Line/Net loopback performs a loopback of the selected T1/E1 in both the network and local loop
directions. Both loopbacks occur at the T1/E1 LIU. The network side loopback occurs at the edge of the
LIU while the T1/E1 loop side loopback occurs deep into the LIU through the receiver, receive equalizer,
transmit jitter attenuator, and the T1/E1 transmit drivers. See Figure 6-5 on page 6-3 for an illustration of
this test.
CODEC
(1 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(1 of 28)
F
R
A
M
E
R
M12/G.747
MUX/DMUX
(1 of 7)
D
S
2
F
R
A
M
E
R
D
S
3
DSX-3
LIU
M23
MUX/DMUX
CODEC
(28 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(28 of 28)
Figure 6-5. Digital Line/Network Loopback
61200290L1-1G
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6, Loopbacks
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Codec Line/Net
A Codec Line/Net loopback performs a loopback of the selected T1/E1 in both the network and local loop
directions. Both loopbacks occur at the T1/E1 codec. Both the network and the local loop side of the
loopback are executed at the edge of the codec, completely testing the M13 mux and the T1/E1 LIU. See
CODEC
(1 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(1 of 28)
F
R
A
M
E
R
M12/G.747
MUX/DMUX
(1 of 7)
D
S
2
F
R
A
M
E
R
D
S
3
DSX-3
LIU
M23
MUX/DMUX
CODEC
(28 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(28 of 28)
Figure 6-6. Codec Loopback
Remote Loopback
A Remote Loopback performs a loopback of the selected T1/E1 on the far-end M13 multiplexer. If an
MX2800 is located at the far end, an Analog Network Loopback is executed when a Remote Loopback is
engaged. This loopback is only available when the DS3 is configured for C-bit parity framing since it
requires the availability of the far-end alarm and control (FEAC) channel. See ANSI T1.107.
CSU Loopback
A CSU Loopback enables the MX2800 to generate a CSU loop up pattern (001001…) toward the T1 CSU
attached to the selected T1 line for six seconds. After six seconds have elapsed, the pattern ceases; and
incoming network traffic is passed through to the CSU device. If the CSU device responded to the CSU
loop up pattern, it returns all data back toward the network. A loop down pattern (0000100001….) is
generated toward the CSU for 6 seconds when Data Mode is selected.
NOTE
When in CSU Loopback, only the Data Mode for the T1 under test may be
selected. Selecting any other option will result in an error message.
CSU Loopback w/BERT
A CSU Loopback w/BERT enables the MX2800 to test the local T1 loop to the CSU using the QRSS
pseudorandom bit sequence. When CSU Loopback w/BERT is selected, the MX2800 initiates a CSU
loopback toward the CSU attached to the selected T1 line. Six seconds after starting the CSU loop up
pattern, the MX2800 ceases sending the CSU loop up pattern and begins sending an unframed QRSS
pattern toward the CSU. If the CSU device responded to the CSU loop up pattern, the MX2800 checks the
incoming pattern for errors. Additional menu items appear to show the state of pattern synchronization,
6-4
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Loopbacks, Section 6
error count, and a clear error count option. See Figure 6-7 on page 6-5. Selecting Data Mode will cease the
transmission of the QRSS pattern and start transmission of a loop down pattern as previously described.
NOTE
When in CSU Loopback w/BERT, only the Data Mode for the T1 under
test may be selected. Selecting any other option results in an error
message.
Figure 6-7. Loopback Menu with BERT Selected
Line BERT
A Line BERT enables the MX2800 to perform a “head-to-head” BERT test toward the CSU. Selecting Line
BERT replaces all incoming network traffic for the selected T1 with an unframed QRSS pattern toward the
CSU. When Line BERT is selected, additional menu items appear and show the state of pattern synchroni-
zation, cumulative error count, and a clear error count option. Selecting Data Mode ceases QRSS pattern
generation and substitution of the incoming data stream.
NOTE
When in Line BERT mode, only the Data Mode option for the T1 under
test may be selected. Selecting any other option will result in an error
message being displayed.
61200290L1-1G
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6, Loopbacks
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
NOTE
Only one T1 port may engage a CSU Loopback, CSU Loopback w/BERT,
or a Line BERT. If a CSU Loopback, CSU Loopback w/BERT, or a Line
BERT is already active at the time a new CSU Loopback, CSU Loopback
w/BERT, or Line BERT is selected, the former test is terminated, and the
latter test is engaged.
3. DS3 LOOPBACKS
provide descriptions and illustrations of the testing options. Select Data Mode to end a test in progress.
Figure 6-8. DS3 Loopback Menu
CAUTION
If IP forwarding is enabled, a user should not perform a DS3 Loopback
from the menus of the far-end (non-LAN end) MX2800. The communi-
cation link is over the DS3. If a loopback is performed, communication
will be lost with the far-end MX2800. If this happens and a loopback
timeout is not active, the user must cycle power to the far-end MX2800 to
cancel the loopback and regain access to the shelf.
6-6
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Loopbacks, Section 6
Line Loopback
Line Loopback performs a loop of the DS3 back to the network. This loopback occurs just prior to the DS3
framer and B3ZS decoder, but it makes full use of the DS3 LIU in both receive and transmit directions;
therefore, any coding violations received by the DS3 will be inserted back into the network without
NOTE
If a Line loopback is active when the MX2800 is operating in the Local
timing mode, the timing source for the DS3 is effectively removed from
the circuit. Therefore, it is up to the test equipment or network to provide
DS3 timing into the circuit for the duration of the test.
CODEC
(1 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(1 of 28)
F
R
A
M
E
R
M12/G.747
MUX/DMUX
(1 of 7)
D
S
2
F
R
A
M
E
R
D
S
3
DSX-3
LIU
M23
MUX/DMUX
CODEC
(28 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(28 of 28)
Figure 6-9. Line Loopback Test
Digital Loopback
A Digital Loopback loops the entire DS3 back to the local loop side. The end effect of this test is a
loopback of all T1/E1s after being fully multiplexed and de-multiplexed to and from a DS3. The incoming
DS3 data is ignored, and the outgoing DS3 stream is substituted in its place just prior to exiting the DS3
CODEC
(1 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(1 of 28)
F
R
A
M
E
R
M12/G.747
MUX/DMUX
(1 of 7)
D
S
2
F
R
A
M
E
R
D
S
3
DSX-3
LIU
M23
MUX/DMUX
CODEC
(28 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(28 of 28)
Figure 6-10. Digital Loopback
61200290L1-1G
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6, Loopbacks
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Metallic Loopback
A Metallic Loopback test loops the entire DS3 back to the local loop side. The end effect of this test is a
loopback of all T1/E1s after being fully multiplexed and de-multiplexed to and from a DS3 and passed
through both directions of the DS3 LIU. During this test, the incoming DS3 is disconnected from the DS3
receiver and the outgoing DS3 signal is substituted in its place. See Figure 6-11 on page 6-8 for an illustra-
tion of this test.
NOTE
The DS3 Line Length should be set to Short before performing this
loopback.
CODEC
(1 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(1 of 28)
F
R
A
M
E
R
M12/G.747
MUX/DMUX
(1 of 7)
D
S
2
F
R
A
M
E
R
D
S
3
DSX-3
LIU
M23
MUX/DMUX
CODEC
(28 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(28 of 28)
Figure 6-11. Metallic Loopback Test
Remote Loopback
A Remote Loopback performs a loopback on the far-end M13 multiplexer. This loopback is available only
when the DS3 is configured for C-bit parity framing since it requires the availability of the FEAC channel.
See ANSI T1.107.
NOTE
Local timing must be selected before initiating this loopback. If
necessary, it may be returned after loopback has been cancelled.
Remote All T1/E1
A Remote All T1/E1 loopback performs a loopback of all T1/E1 channels on the far-end M13 multiplexer.
If an MX2800 is located at the far end, an Analog Loopback is executed on all active channels simulta-
neously. The form of this loopback code sent to the far-end will depend on the framing mode being used.
When in C-Bit parity mode, the MX2800 will send loopback commands over the FEAC channel. When
operating in M13 framing mode, the MX2800 will send C-Bit loopbacks at the DS2 level.
6-8
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Loopbacks, Section 6
4. DS2 LOOPBACKS
Once a number has been selected which corresponds with the DS2 to be tested, the DS2 menu in
illustration of the DS2 Network loopback testing option. Select the appropriate DS2 Data Mode to end a
test in progress.
Figure 6-12. DS2 Loopback Menu
DS2 Network
A DS2 Network loopback test loops the selected DS2 back to the network (DS3) prior to being passed
through the M12/G.747 de-multiplexer. All T1/E1s attached to that DS2 will receive data normally, but all
data inserted into the T1/E1s attached to the selected DS2 will be ignored and replaced by the incoming
CODEC
(1 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(1 of 28)
F
R
A
M
E
R
M12/G.747
MUX/DMUX
(1 of 7)
D
S
2
F
R
A
M
E
R
D
S
3
DSX-3
LIU
M23
MUX/DMUX
CODEC
(28 of 28)
T1/E1 LIU
(28 of 28)
Figure 6-13. DS2 Network Loopback Test
61200290L1-1G
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6, Loopbacks
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
This page is intentionally blank.
6-10
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 7, CIRCUIT AND NETWORK REDUNDANCY
Section 7
Circuit and Network Redundancy
1. INTRODUCTION
The MX2800 provides backup measures of protection for circuit failure. The following subsections
describe the possible modes of operation:
• Circuit Failure Recovery Mode on page 7-2 furnishes backup protection in the event of controller card
failure
and network protection.
The descriptions given include illustrations and suggested configuration settings.
NOTE
The settings may need modification based on your network configuration.
2. NONREDUNDANT MODE
In Nonredundant Mode, the MX2800 houses only one controller card. There is no failure protection. In the
event of a failure, an alarm is initiated and the front panel LEDs reflect the condition. See Figure 7-1 on
page 7-1 for an illustration.
Figure 7-1. Nonredundant Mode
61200290L1-1G
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 7, Circuit and Network Redundancy
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
NOTE
In this mode, the DS3 must be connected to the IN and OUT jacks for
DS3 A.
3. CIRCUIT FAILURE RECOVERY MODE
In Circuit Failure Recovery Mode, two controller cards are installed with an incoming single DS3 line. See
Figure 7-2 on page 7-2. In this mode, the MX2800 can continue operating in the event of a controller card
failure. When both cards are healthy, the primary card actively processes data while the secondary card
stands by and is ready to take over if the first fails. The secondary card continuously monitors the line and
remains framed to the incoming signal.
NOTE
During a card switch, service interruption occurs on both the DS3 and the
DSX1 connections. However, since the secondary controller card remains
framed to the incoming signal at all times, it is a minimal interruption.
Figure 7-2. Circuit Failure Recovery Mode
Table 7-1. Configuration Requirements for Circuit Recovery
Selection Path
Recommended Setting
*
Config > Network Interface > XCV Threshold
1E-3
Config > Network Interface > Network Protection
Config > Network Interface > Max. Switch Threshold
Disabled
3
7-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Circuit and Network Redundancy, Section 7
Table 7-1. Configuration Requirements for Circuit Recovery (Continued)
Config > Network Interface > Min. Switching Period
Config > T1/E1 Interface > T1/E1 Circuit Protection
10 seconds
Enable all or select theT1/E1s that redundant
switching should occur on.
Config > T1/E1 Interface > XCV Threshold
1E-3
*. This is a critical alarm only when Inactive Card is not installed or is not working.
4. CIRCUIT AND NETWORK FAILURE RECOVERY MODE
In this mode, two controller cards are installed and connected to two individual DS3 lines. This is the most
complete mode of redundancy. In this mode, the primary controller card is connected to the primary DS3
line and the secondary controller card is connected to the secondary DS3 line. The primary card and line
actively transmit data, while the other card and line stand by ready to take over if the first card and line fail.
A feature of the MX2800 is its ability to internally re-route the network connection if a controller card and
the opposite network connection fail. For example, in the illustration given in Figure 7-3 on page 7-3,
failed DS3 A is connected to healthy Card A and healthy DS3 B is connected to failed Card B. In a case
like this, the MX2800 is able to automatically re-route DS3 B to Card A.
The configuration requirements for this mode are the same as the ones given for Circuit Failure Recovery
Figure 7-3. Circuit and Network Failure Recovery Mode
61200290L1-1G
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 7, Circuit and Network Redundancy
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
This page is intentionally blank.
7-4
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 8, POWER LOSS RECOVERY
Section 8
Power Loss Recovery
1. INTRODUCTION
The MX2800 provides backup measures of protection for both power supply and power source failure. The
following subsections describe the possible modes of operation:
card failure
source failure
2. NONREDUNDANT POWER MODE
In Nonredundant Power Mode, the MX2800 houses only one power supply card; and only one power
source is available. There is no power failure protection. If a power supply card fails, the unit is down until
MX2800
Figure 8-1. Nonredundant Power Mode
61200290L1-1G
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 8, Power Loss Recovery
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
NOTE
Power supplies are hot-swappable.
3. POWER SUPPLY RECOVERY MODE
In Power Supply Recovery Mode, two power supply cards are installed and connected to a single power
failure without interrupting service. The power supplies are load sharing, so either power supply can
provide power for the entire unit.
NOTE
When the unit is configured with dual internal AC power supplies, this is
the only power supply protection mode available.
MX2800
Figure 8-2. Power Supply Failure Recovery Mode
4. POWER SUPPLY AND SOURCE RECOVERY MODE
In this mode, two power supply cards are installed and are connected to two individual power sources. The
MX2800 handles any combination of power source or power supply failure.
Much like the backup design for the controller cards, the MX2800 is able to internally re-route the power
source if a power supply card and the opposite power source fail. For example, in Figure 8-3 on page 8-3,
failed Power Source A is connected to healthy Card A, and healthy Power Source B is connected to failed
Card B. In a case like this, the MX2800 automatically connects Power Source B to Card A.
NOTE
This configuration is available only with DC power supplies.
8-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Power Loss Recovery, Section 8
Figure 8-3. Power Supply and Source Failure Recovery Mode
5. BATTERY BACKUP MODE
With the installation of the ADTRAN Power Supply/Battery Charger (PS/BC) and backup battery pack,
the MX2800 can continue operation without service interruption in the event of a power outage. This
PS/BC (P/N 4175043L2) provides –48 VDC to the MX2800. It receives 115 VAC through a standard plug
and wall socket.
The PS/BC maintains the battery at peak charge (–48 VDC) at all times. If AC power is lost, the unit
automatically supplies power from the battery without interrupting service. When AC power returns, the
unit switches back to AC power and recharges the battery. For installation instructions, refer to the guide
NOTE
The MX2800 can operate on a fully charged battery for 4 hours without
recharging.
61200290L1-1G
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 8, Power Loss Recovery
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
MX2800
1
1
5
AC
0
5
0/
A
6
0
Hz
DC POWER
.8
DS3/STS-1
DSX-1/E1
(OUT)
L
NONCRITICAL
NO COM NC
CRITICAL
A
N
A
B
PW
R
PW
R
–
–
RET
RET
A
FAIL
FAIL
B
Magnified View
-48V
0.7A
OUT
IN
M
O
D
E
T
R
S
T
R
S
M
CLK
CLK
DSX-1/E1
(IN)
A
B
T
RE
R
PW
IL
-
ET
R
R
-
PW
IL
FA
AC/DC Power Supply
Battery Charging Unit
P/N 1175043Lx
AC Power Input
-48 VDC
Backup Battery Pack
P/N 1175044L1
Battery Charger
Power Cable
Figure 8-4. Battery Backup System
8-4
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 9, TRANSACTION LANGUAGE 1 (TL1)
Section 9
Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
1. INTRODUCTION
Transaction Language 1 (TL1) is a Bellcore standard used in the input and output messages that pass
between Operations Systems (OS) and Network Elements (NE) in telecommunication networks. It was
developed to standardize equipment surveillance and memory administration and to test with a common
format.
This release of TL1 primarily supports the interactive and autonomous retrieval of system events as part of
a valid TL1 session.
2. OVERVIEW
TL1 is an ASCII-based language that supports both command-response and autonomous (NE) message
generation. Commonly, TL1 is used over an X.25 packet network but is completely independent of any
physical layer protocols. For the MX2800, TL1 is implemented as a Telnet session or “RAW TCP” session
running over either Ethernet or PPP.
To successfully initiate a TL1 session, the unit must be properly configured for an Ethernet (LAN) or PPP
connection. A valid IP address, gateway address, and subnet mask are required. Refer to System Manage-
ment on page 3-16. User authentication is also required. An account must be set up before initiating a TL1
session.
An account may be set up via the VT100 menus (Configuration/System Management/System Security/
User Account Management.) An account includes a username, password, and privileges. The privileges are
as follows:
• Admin privileges allow the user to use all supported commands.
• Guest privileges allow the user only to activate the TL1 session, cancel a TL1 session, and retrieve
specific system information.
• Interface privileges allow the user to use all supported commands except modifying the user account
information, setting the MX2800 date and time, configuring alarm relays, and operating loopbacks.
• Test privileges allow the user to use all supported commands except modifying the user account
information, configuring alarm relays, and setting the MX2800 date and time.
61200290L1-1G
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Table 9-1. TL1 Account Privileges
TL1 Command
Guest
Interface
Test
Admin
ACT-USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ALW-MSG-rr
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CANC-USER
DLT-USER-SECU
ED-USER-SECU
ED-rr (related to loopbacks)
ED-rr (configuring alarm relays)
ED-rr (all remaining)
ENT-USER-SECU
INH-MSG-rr
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
OPR-LPBK
REPT-STAT
RLS-LPBK
RTRV-ALM-rr
RTRV-COND-rr
RTRV-HDR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
RTRV-rr
RTRV-SYS
RTRV-USER-SECU
RTRV-VER
X
X
X
SET-DAT
To bring up a TL1 Telnet connection (up to eight may be active), a Telnet client requests a connection on
TCP port 3116 (port 2024 is used for “RAW TCP” socket access). Once the Telnet connection is estab-
lished, it is necessary to initiate a TL1 session. Establishing a TL1 session involves successful user authen-
tication. Until a TL1 session is established, all commands other than those used to initiate or terminate a
session are denied. Autonomous messaging is also disabled. For information on using the Act-User
NOTE
page 3-27, the MX2800 attempts to use RADIUS to authenticate TL1
9-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Transaction Language 1 (TL1), Section 9
users. If the RADIUS server presents a login challenge which requires a
response, then the TL1 user re-enters the ACT-USER command,
supplying the appropriate response as the password. Challenges and other
reply messages returned from the RADIUS server are displayed as
comments in the response message from the MX2800.
3. TL1 MESSAGES
As stated earlier, TL1 messages are either part of a command-response exchange or are generated autono-
mously. A TL1 command has the general format as follows:
<verb>[-<mod1>[-<mod2>]]:<tid>:<aid>:<ctag>:<general block>:<keyword
block>: <state block>;
TL1 Responses
There are three types of TL1 responses:
• Acknowledgment messages
• Output Response messages
• Autonomous messages
Acknowledgment Messages
Acknowledgment messages are brief output messages generated in response to received TL1 commands.
The MX2800 currently supports two types of acknowledgment messages:
• In Progress (IP)
• All Right (OK)
In Progress
The IP acknowledgment message is usually generated as an interim response message to indicate that a
message has been received and the command is being executed. IP messages have the following general
format:
IP <ctag><cr><lf>
<
All Right
The OK acknowledgment message indicates that a command has been received, and the required action
was initiated and completed. This message has the following general format:
OK <ctag><cr><lf>
<
61200290L1-1G
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Output Response Messages
Output Response messages are generated in response to received commands. Output Response Messages
have the following general format:
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<tid>^<yr>-<mo>-<day>^<hr>:<min>:<sec><cr><lf>
M^^<ctag>^<completion code><cr><lf>
^^^<errcode><cr><lf>;
For the MX2800, the Completion Code field contains one of the following values:
• Comply indicates a successful execution of the received command.
• Deny indicates denial of the received command.
When the received command is denied, the line in the message following the Completion Code line
contains a four letter error code. Refer to TL1 Error Codes on page 9-17 for an indication of the possible
MX2800 error codes.
The MX2800 specifically uses quoted line(s) in the response message of successfully executed RTRV-
ALM commands. The quoted line format is as follows:
<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>…
The NTFCNCDE field contains one of the following values:
• MN - Minor
• MJ - Major
• CR - Critical
Autonomous Messages
The Autonomous message is sent from the NE to the OS and is not associated with any explicit input
message. The MX2800 uses this message to exclusively report alarmed and non-alarmed events. An auton-
omous message has the following general format:
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<tid>^<yr>-<mo>-<day>^<hr>:<min>:<sec><cr><lf>
<alarm code>^<atag>^<verb>[^<mod1>[^mod2>]]<cr><lf>
^^^"<aid>:<message parameters>"<cr><lf>;
Possible values for the Alarm Code field include the following:
• *C - Critical Alarm
• ** - Major Alarm
• * - Minor Alarm
• A - Non-alarm
• Null - (blank)
9-4
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Transaction Language 1 (TL1), Section 9
The MX2800 specifically uses quoted line(s) in REPT-ALM and REPT-EVT Autonomous messages. The
REPT-ALM message has the following quoted line format:
<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condtype>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>…
The NTFCNCDE field contains one of the following values:
• CL indicates alarm cleared.
• TC indicates transient condition.
• MN indicates minor.
• MJ indicates major.
• CR indicates critical.
The REPT-EVT message has the following quoted line format:
<aid>:<ntfcncde>,<condeff>,<srveff>,<ocrdat>,<ocrtm>,<locn>…
The CONDEFF field will contain one of the following values:
• CL indicates standing condition cleared.
• SC indicates standing condition raised.
• TC indicates transient condition.
For possible CONDTYPE codes for both REPT-ALM and REPT-EVT quoted lines, see the condition types
Refer to the section TL1 Autonomous Messages on page 9-11 for a list of Autonomous messages currently
supported by the MX2800.
4. TL1 COMMANDS
<verb>[-<mod1>[-<mod2>]]:<tid>:<aid>:<ctag>:<general block>:<keyword
block>: <state block>;
Areas of concentration for TL1 support in the MX2800 include session initiation, session termination, and
NOTE
61200290L1-1G
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Table 9-2. TL1 Commands
ACT-USER:<tid>:<username>:<ctag>::<password>;
Description
TID
Initiates a TL1 session
Target ID
AID
Username (must be present in the User Account Management table)
Transaction Number (integer)
CTAG*
PARAM1
Password for associated username
ALW-MSG-{EQPT|rr|ALL}:<tid>::<ctag>;
Description
MOD2
Allows the transmission of the requested autonomous alarm(s)
Specifies what entity type to allow:
• EQPT General Equipment Unit
• rr
Facility or Circuit (i.e. T1, T2, T3)
All entity types
• ALL
TID
Target ID
CTAG*
PARAM1*
Transaction Number (integer)
Specifies what notification code to allow:
• MN
• MJ
minor
major
• CR
• ALL
critical
all notification codes
CANC-USER:<tid>::<ctag>;
Description
TID
Terminates a TL1 session
Target ID
AID*
Username (must be present in the User Account Management table)
Transaction Number (integer)
CTAG*
ED-USER-SECU:<tid>:<username>:<ctag>::,<password>,,<privileges>;
Description
TID
Edits the requested user’s account
Target ID
AID
Username
CTAG*
PARAM2
PARAM4
Transaction Number (integer)
User’s new password
User’s new privileges:
• 0
• 1
• 2
• 4
• 8
disabled
guest
interface
test
admin
9-6
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Transaction Language 1 (TL1), Section 9
Table 9-2. TL1 Commands (Continued)
ENT-USER-SECU:<tid>:<username>:<ctag>::<password>,,<privileges>;
Description
TID
Adds the requested user to the User Account Management table
Target ID
AID
Username
CTAG*
PARAM1
PARAM3
Transaction Number (integer)
User’s password
User’s privileges:
• 0
• 1
• 2
• 4
• 8
disabled
guest
interface
test
admin
DLT-USER-SECU:<tid>:<username>:<ctag>;
Description
TID
Removes the requested user from the User Account Management table
Target ID
AID
Username
CTAG*
Transaction Number (integer)
INH-MSG-{EQPT|rr|ALL}:<tid>::<ctag>:<ntfcncde>;
Description
MOD2
Inhibits the transmission of the requested autonomous alarm(s)
Specifies what entity type to inhibit:
• EQPT General Equipment Unit
• rr
Facility or Circuit (i.e. T1, T2, T3)
All entity types
• ALL
TID
Target ID
CTAG*
PARAM1*
Transaction Number (integer)
Specifies what notification code to inhibit:
• MN
• MJ
minor
major
• CR
• ALL
critical
all notification codes
RTRV-HDR:<tid>::<ctag>;
Description
TID
Replies with a normal “COMPLD” response
Target ID
CTAG*
Transaction Number (integer)
61200290L1-1G
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Table 9-2. TL1 Commands (Continued)
RTRV-VER:<tid>::<ctag>;
Description
Retrieves the current software revision
Target ID
TID
CTAG*
Transaction Number (integer)
RTRV-SYS:<tid>::<ctag>;
Description
TID
Retrieves the system identifier string
Target ID
CTAG*
Transaction Number (integer)
RTRV-USER-SECU:<tid>::<ctag>;
Description
TID
Retrieves the current list of users from the TL1 users table
Target ID
CTAG*
Transaction Number (integer)
RTRV-ALM-{EQPT|rr|ALL}:<tid>::<ctag>;
Description
MOD2
Retrieves the requested alarm status
Specifies what entity type to query:
• EQPT General Equipment Unit
• rr
Facility or Circuit (i.e. T1, T2, T3)
All entity types
• ALL
TID
Target ID
9-8
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Transaction Language 1 (TL1), Section 9
Table 9-2. TL1 Commands (Continued)
AID*
Identifies the component to which the desired alarm pertains. Identifiers are integers
and are dependent on the entity specified in “MOD2” as follows:
for EQPT:
401
402
403
404
405
ALL
Generic
Control Card A
Control Card B
Power Supply A
Power Supply B
all EQPT identifiers (default selection)
for T1:
101
102
.
DS1#1
DS1#2
128
ALL
DS1#28
all DS1 circuits (default selection)
for T2:
201
202
.
DS2#1
DS2#2
207
ALL
DS2#7
all DS2 circuits (default selection)
for T3:
301
302
303
ALL
DS3#1
DS3 (Control Card A)
DS3 (Control Card B)
all DS3 circuits (default selection)
for ALL:
x
specific identifier (e.g. 1, 28, etc.)
all identifiers (default selection)
ALL
CTAG*
Transaction Number (integer)
61200290L1-1G
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Table 9-2. TL1 Commands (Continued)
RTRV-COND-{EQPT|rr|ALL}:<tid>::<ctag>;
Description
MOD2
Retrieves the requested alarms and conditions
Specifies what entity type to query:
• EQPT General Equipment Unit
• rr
Facility or Circuit (i.e. T1, VT1, STS1)
All entity types
• ALL
TID
Target ID
AID*
Identifies the component to which the desired alarm pertains. Identifiers are integers
and are dependent on the entity specified in “MOD2” as follows:
for EQPT:
401
402
403
404
405
ALL
Generic
Control Card A
Control Card B
Power Supply A
Power Supply B
all EQPT identifiers (default selection)
for T1:
101
102
.
DS1#1
DS1#2
128
ALL
DS1#28
all DS1 circuits (default selection)
for T2:
201
202
.
DS2#1
DS2#2
207
ALL
DS2#7
all DS2 circuits (default selection)
for T3:
301
302
303
ALL
DS3#1
DS3 (Control Card A)
DS3 (Control Card B)
all DS3 circuits (default selection)
for ALL:
x
specific identifier (e.g. 1, 28, etc.)
all identifiers (default selection)
ALL
CTAG*
Transaction Number (integer)
9-10
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Transaction Language 1 (TL1), Section 9
Table 9-2. TL1 Commands (Continued)
SET-DAT:<tid>::<ctag>::<YY-MM-DD>,<HH-MM-SS>;
Description
PARAM1
PARAM2
Sets the date and time
Date in YY-MM-DD format
Time in HH-MM-SS format
* An asterisk indicates optional command blocks.
TL1 Autonomous Messages
Autonomous messages provide a mechanism for real time reporting of system events. Although most
events reported are alarms, some events are only informational. The Verb, Mod1, and Mod2 parameters of
the message indicate what type of event has occurred.
NOTE
The default setting for Autonomous message reporting is OFF.
Follow these steps to enable Autonomous message reporting:
• If it has not already been done, initiate a TL1 session by following the setup procedures and using the
ACT-USER command.
• Use the ALW-MSG command to enable autonomous messaging. This command is described in
alarm events and includes recommended actions to take. REPT-EVT indicates an informational event.
61200290L1-1G
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 9-3. MX2800 Alarm Events
Notification
Code
Condition
Type
Service
Affecting
AID
Location
Description
Recommended Action
101-128
101-128
MN
MJ
ACTLPBK
LOS
SA
SA
NEND
NEND
DS1 In-test
No action. (This alarm is normal during DS1 loopback tests).
Check DS1 facility entering MX2800 for valid signal.
REPT
ALM
T1
Loss Of Signal
201-207
MJ
OOF
SA
NEND
DS2 Out Of Frame
Check for DS3 alarms. If none, check settings at far-end M13
multiplexer.
REPT
ALM
T2
201-207
301
MJ
RAI
SA
SA
SA
FEND
NEND
FEND
DS2 Remote Alarm Indication
DS3 in-test
Check status Of DS2 at far-end M13 multiplexer.
MN
MN
TSA
No action (This alarm is normal during DS3 loopback tests.)
REPT
ALM
T3
301
EXT-DS3
FEND DS3 Equipment failure
SA
Examine far-end M13 multiplexer to determine the reason it has
signaled this condition.
301
301
MN
MN
LOS
OOF
SA
SA
FEND
FEND
FEND DS3 Loss of Signal
FEND DS3 Out of Frame
Check DS3 facility entering the far-end M13 multiplexer.
Check DS3 facility entering the far-end M13 multiplexer
(including checking the provisioned DS3 framing type).
301
MN
AIS
SA
FEND
FEND DS3 Alarm Indication
Signal
Check status of DS3 at far-end M13 multiplexer.
301
301
MN
MN
ISD
SA
FEND
FEND
FEND DS3 Idle
Check for DS3 idle signal at far-end M13 multiplexer.
EXT-DS3
NSA
FEND DS3 Equipment Failure
NSA
Examine far-end M13 multiplexer to determine the reason it has
signaled this condition.
301
301
301
301
MN
MN
MN
MN
EXT
NSA
SA
FEND
FEND
FEND
FEND
FEND Common Equipment
Failure
Examine far-end M13 multiplexer to determine the reason it has
signaled this condition.
LOS-M
EXT-DS1
LOS-S
FEND Multiple DS1 Loss of
Signal
Check for loss of signal at DS1 ports on far-end M13 multi-
plexer.
SA
FEND DS1 Equipment Failure
SA
Examine far-end M13 multiplexer to determine the reason it has
signaled this condition.
SA
FEND Single DS1 Loss of
Signal
Check for loss of signal at DS1 ports on far-end M13 multi-
plexer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 9-3. MX2800 Alarm Events (Continued)
Notification
Code
Condition
Type
Service
Affecting
AID
Location
Description
Recommended Action
301
302
MN
CR
EXT-DS1
LOS
NSA
FEND
FEND DS1 Equipment Failure
NSA
Examine far-end M13 multiplexer to determine the reason it has
signaled this condition.
REPT
ALM
T3
SA
SA
SA
SA
NEND
NEND
FEND
FEND
DS3 Loss Of Signal
DS3 Out Of Frame
Check DS3 facility entering the MX2800 for a valid signal.
(CTRL A)
303
(CTRL B)
302
(CTRL A)
CR
MJ
OOF
RAI
ISD
Check The provisioning of the DS3 framing type (M13 OR C-
Bit) to make sure it matches the facility. If this is correct, check
the DS3 facility entering the MX2800 for valid DS3 framing.
303
(CTRL B)
302
(CTRL A)
DS3 Remote Alarm
Indication
Check the DS3 facility entering the far-end M13 multiplexer for
AIS or severely-errored frames.
303
(CTRL B)
302
(CTRL A)
MN
DS3 idle
Check the far-end M13 multiplexer and any intermediate devices
for reasons why they might be sending DS3 idle toward the
MX2800.
303
(CTRL B)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 9-3. MX2800 Alarm Events (Continued)
Notification
Code
Condition
Type
Service
Affecting
AID
Location
Description
Recommended Action
401
(GENERAL)
MN
CTNEQPT
NSA
NEND
Controller Communication
Failure
Check the standby card for proper LED behavior (and replace if
necessary). If no problem is found, call ADTRAN Technical
Support for further troubleshooting details.
REPT
ALM
EQPT
402
(CTRL A)
MN
CTNEQPT
NSA
SA
NEND
NEND
NEND
Controller Card Failure
Ds3 Transmit Loss Of Signal
Controller Card Removed
Power Supply Failure
Replace the card which reports failure (should be indicated by a
flashing red ACT LED and the AID of the alarm).
403
(CTRL B)
402
(CTRL A)
CR
TRMT
Replace the card for which TLOS is reported. Use the aid of the
alarm to identify the card.
403
(CTRL B)
402
(CTRL A)
MN
PROTNA
NSA
Check to see if card was removed or reset by on-site personnel.
403
(CTRL B)
404 (PS A)
405 (PS B)
404 (PS A)
405 (PS B)
MN
MN
PWR
NSA
NSA
NEND
NEND
Replace the failed power supply. Use the aid of the alarm to
identify the card.
MISC
Power Supply
Replace the failed power supply. Use the aid of the alarm to
identify the card.
Communication Failure
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 9-3. MX2800 Alarm Events (Continued)
Notification
Code
Condition
Type
Service
Affecting
AID
Location
Description
Recommended Action
404 (PS A)
405 (PS B)
404 (PS A)
405 (PS B)
404 (PS A)
405 (PS B)
404 (PS A)
405 (PS B)
404 (PS A)
405 (PS B)
MN
MN
MJ
PWR-5
NSA
NEND
Power Supply Low
Replace the failed power supply. Use the aid of the alarm to
identify the card.
REPT
ALM
EQPT
HITEMP
HITEMP
PWR-48
PROTNA
NSA
NSA
NSA
NSA
NEND
NEND
NEND
NEND
Power Supply Temp High
Power Supply Temp Critical
Reduce the temperature of the MX2800's operating environment
or provide better ventilation.
Reduce the temperature of the MX2800's operating environment
or provide better ventilation.
MN
MN
Power Supply Source
Failure
Check the –48 volt input indicated by the AID for a blown fuse
or disconnected/incorrect wiring.
Power Supply Card Removed
Check to see if card was removed by on-site personnel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 9-4. MX2800 Informational Events
Notification
Code
Condition
Type
Service
Affecting
AID
101-128
Location
Description
Recommended Action
EVT
EVT
EVT
BPV
NSA
NEND
Excessive DS1 Bipolar Viola-
tion
Make sure the line coding (B8ZS/AMI) is provisioned
correctly for this DS1 facility. Check the DS1 facility entering
the MX2800 for impairments which may cause line code
violations.
REPT
EVT T1
101-128
101-128
AIS
NSA
NSA
FEND
FEND
DS1 Line AIS (LAIS)
Check the status of this DS1 signal toward the MX2800 at
each DS1 device (for example, an intermediate device which
sees LOS on the DS1 toward the MX2800 may transmit AIS
toward the MX2800 in response).
AISUONE
S
DS1 Carrier AIS (CAIS)
If there are no DS3 or DS2 alarms reported, check the status of
the DS1 facility entering the far-end M13 multiplexer. For
example, if the far end M13 multiplexer detects LOS on the
DS1 facility, it will send DS1 AIS over the DS3 toward the
MX2800.
201-207
EVT
EVT
AIS
AIS
NSA
NSA
FEND
FEND
DS2 AIS
Check status of DS2 at the far-end M13 multiplexer.
REPT
EVT T2
REPT
302
(CTRL A)
DS3 Alarm Indication Signal
Check the status of the DS3 signal toward the MX2800 at each
DS3 device. (For example, an intermediate device which sees
LOS or LOF on the DS3 toward the MX2800 may transmit
AIS toward the MX2800 in response.)
EVT T3
303
(CTRL B)
302
(CTRL A)
EVT
BPV
NSA
NEND
Excessive DS3 Bipolar Viola-
tion
Check DS3 facility entering the MX2800 for problems which
may produce bipolar violations.
303
(CTRL B)
401
(GENERAL)
EVT
EVT
WKSWPR
ESW
NSA
NSA
NEND
NEND
Protection Switch
If protection switch was not performed manually, check for
other alarms indicating the failure which caused the switch.
REPT
EVT
EQPT
401
(GENERAL)
Excessive Protection Switch
If protection switches were not performed manually, check for
other alarms indicating the failure(s) which caused the
switches.
402
CTRL A
EVT
PROGFLT
NSA
NEND
Software
Version
Mismatch
Reset the reported card so the new software can take effect.
REPT
EVT
EQPT
403
CTRL B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Transaction Language 1 (TL1), Section 9
5. TL1 ERROR CODES
When the MX2800 denies a received TL1 command, the Output Response message has an associated four
Table 9-5. TL1 Error Codes
Error Code
ICNV
Description
Input, Command Not Valid
IDRG
IIAC
Input, Date Range
Input, Invalid Access Identifier
Input, Invalid Target Identifier
Input, Parameter Not Valid
IITA
IPNV
PIUI
Privilege, Input User Not Valid
Privilege, Login Not Active or Insufficient Privileges
Status, Requested Operation Failed
Status, System Resources Exceeded
PLNA
SROF
SSRE
TL1 Editing
TL1 editing commands allow the MX2800 to be provisioned through a TL1 session rather than through the
menu system that is accessed using a VT100 terminal emulator. User account information must be provi-
sioned through a console menu session or TL1 session prior to initiating a TL1 session. Once a TL1
commands may be used. The standard format for an edit command is as follows:
ED-rr:<tid>:<aid>:<ctag>:::<keyword>=<value>;
The parameter descriptions are as follows:
• rr is T1, T2, T3, or EQPT
• <tid> is the Target Identifier
• <aid> is the Access Identifier
• <ctag> is a 1-to-6 character correlation tag (echoed in response)
• <keyword> is one of the entries from the data dictionaries in Table 9-6 on page 9-20, Table 9-7 on
• <value> is one of the enumerated types in the data dictionaries, an integer, or Y/N, depending on the
TYPE.
61200290L1-1G
9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
NOTE
<aid> and <ctag> are optional parameter. The placemarker : must remain
in place. The default <aid> is All and the default <ctag> is 1.
TL1 Editing Examples:
ED-T1:UNIT-1:106:1:::LBO=133TO266; (This would edit line build out for T1 #6 to be 133 to 266.)
ED-T2:UNIT-1:205:2:::DS2CFGMODE=T1; (This would configure T2 #5 for T1 mode versus E1.)
ED-T3:UNIT-1:300:3:::DS3MAXNUMSW=3; (This would set maximum number of switches for
controller cards to 3.)
ED-EQPT:UNIT-1:400:4:::PSTEMPCRITRLY=Y; (This would enable the alarm relay for power supply
temperature critical.)
To view the value of a parameter, a retrieve (RTRV) command is used. The standard format for the RTRV
command is as follows:
RTRV-rr:<tid>:<aid>:<ctag>:::<keyword>;
The parameter descriptions are as follows:
• rr is T1, T2, T3, or EQPT
• <tid> is the Target Identifier
• <aid> is the Access Identifier
• <ctag> is a 1 to 6 character correlation tag (echoed in response)
NOTE
<aid> and <ctag> are optional parameter. The placemarker : must remain
in place. The default <aid> is All and the default <ctag> is 1.
TL1 RTRV examples:
RTRV-R1::109:4; (This would return the values for all parameters related to T1 #9.)
NOTE
If no parameter is specified, all valid parameters to the <aid> are
retrieved.
RTRV-T1:UNIT-1:106:1:::LBO; (This would return the value of line build out for T1 #6.)
RTRV-T2:UNIT-1:205:2:::DS2CFGMODE; (This would return the configuration mode of T2 #5.)
9-18
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Transaction Language 1 (TL1), Section 9
RTRV-T3:UNIT-1:300:3:::DS3MAXNUMSW; (This would return the setting for the maximum number of
switches for controller cards.)
RTRV-EQPT:UNIT-1:400:5:::PSTEMPCRITRLY; (This would return the status of the alarm relay for
power supply temperature critical.)
61200290L1-1G
9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Data Dictionaries
The data dictionaries that follow are to be used while performing TL1 editing or retrieve commands. Each
data dictionary contains four columns. The columns are as follows:
• Keyword gives the values to be placed in the <keyword> portion of the edit command.
• Type describes the type of <value> that is required to be entered in the edit command.
– ENUM requires a text and/or number string to be entered as the <value>.
– Y/N requires a Y or N representing yes or no to be entered as the <value>.
– INT requires that an integer be entered as the <value>.
• Domain describes valid entries that may be entered into the <value> portion of the edit command.
• Description explains each of the edit or retrieve commands.
Table 9-6 contains entries that are used to edit or retrieve options for the DS3 portion of the MX2800.
When performing TL1 edit commands from this table, the value of rr should be T3, and the <aid> value
should be one of the following:
• 300 for all DS3 Circuits
• 301 for DS3 #1
• 302 for DS3 Control Card A
• 303 for DS3 Control Card B
Table 9-6. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS3
Keyword
Type
Domain
Description
ACTIVECONTROLLER ENUM
One of the following:
Selects which controller card is active
• controller card A is active
• A
• B
• controller card B is active
CARDSWRLY
DIAGDS3
Y/N
Y or [N]
Identifies status of System Protection Switch
alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
ENUM
One of the following:
• DATAMODE
• LINELPBK
• DIGLPBK
Enables the selected DS3 loopback
• METLPBK
• REMLPBK
• ALLT1
DS3AISRLY
Y/N
Y or [N]
Identifies status of DS3 AIS alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
9-20
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Transaction Language 1 (TL1), Section 9
Table 9-6. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS3 (Continued)
Keyword
Type
Domain
Description
DS3CVTHRS
ENUM
One of the following:
• Disable
• 1E3
Indicates a limit on the number of code viola-
tions accepted by the unit over the DS3
before the unit switches controller cards
• 1E3 - 1 out of every 1,000 bits contains a
CV
• 1E4
• 1E5
• 1E4 - 1 out of every 10,000 bits contains a
CV
• 1E6
• 1E5 - 1 out of every 100,000 bits contains
a CV
• 1E6 - 1 out of every 1,000,000 bits
contains a CV
DS3LOFRLY
Y/N
Y/N
INT
Y or [N]
Identifies status of DS3 LOF alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
DS3LOSRLY
Y or [N]
Identifies status of DS3 LOS alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
DS3MAXNUMSW
0, 1, 2, ..., N
Maximum number of times per hour the unit
is allowed to switch between controller cards.
If number is exceeded, the unit will issue a
trap
DS3MINSWPERIOD
DS3PROT
INT
Y/N
0, 1, 2, ..., N
Y or [N]
Number of seconds that must pass after a
protection switch before another protection
switch will be allowed
Identifies status of DS3 protection switching
• Yes (Y) - enables DS3 protection switching
• No (N) - disables DS3 protection switching
DS3RAIRLY
DS3TLOSRLY
DS3XCVRLY
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y or [N]
Y or [N]
Y or [N]
Identifies status of DS3 RAI alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
Identifies status of DS3 TLOS alarm relay
Yes (Y) - enables alarm
No (N) - disables alarm
Identifies status of DS3 XCV alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
61200290L1-1G
9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Table 9-6. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS3 (Continued)
Keyword
Type
Domain
Description
FMT
ENUM
One of the following:
• CBIT
Sets framing format to match the format of
the receive signal at the network interface
• The framing format s set to CBIT
• The framing format is set to M13
• M13
LINELEN
ENUM
ENUM
One of the following:
• LONG
Identifies Network DS3 line length
• LONG - exceeds 50 feet.
• SHORT
• SHORT - less than 50 feet.
RMTLPBK
One of the following:
• DISABLE
• EITHER
Indicates whether the unit will respond to
remote loopbacks over FEAC, CBIT,
EITHER, or if remote loopbacks are disabled
• DISABLE - do not respond
• FEAC
• EITHER - respond over either FEAC or
CBIT
• CBIT
• FEAC - respond over FEAC
• CBIT - respond over CBIT
SYSCARDARLY
SYSCARDBRLY
SYSCARDCOMMRLY
SYSCARDRLY
TMG
Y/N
Y or [N]
Y or [N]
Y or [N]
Y or [N]
Identifies status of System Controller Card A
alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
Y/N
Identifies status of System Controller Card B
alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
Y/N
Identifies status of System Communication
Fail alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
Y/N
Identifies status of System Controller Card
alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
ENUM
One of the following:
• LPD
Identifies timing supply for the DS3
• LPD - loop timed
• INT
• INT - internal timing source
9-22
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Transaction Language 1 (TL1), Section 9
Table 9-7 contains entries that are used to edit or retrieve options for the DS2 portion of the MX2800.
When performing TL1 edit commands from this table, the value of rr should be T2 and the <aid> value
should be one of the following:
201 - DS2#1
202 - DS2#2
.
.
.
207 - DS2#7
Table 9-7. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS2
Keyword
Type
Domain
Description
DIAGDS2TESTSTATE
ENUM
One of the following:
• DATAMODE
• NETWORK
Identifies DS2 Diagnostic Loopback
• NETWORK selects the available loopback
• DATAMODE ends a test in progress
DS2AISRLY
Y/N
Y or [N]
Identifies status of DS2 AIS alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
DS2CFGMODE
ENUM
One of the following:
Identifies DS2 Configuration
• T1
• E1
• T1 sets DS2 configuration to M12 (4xT1).
• E1 sets DS2 configuration to G.747
(3xE1).
DS2LOSRLY
DS2RAIRLY
Y/N
Y/N
Y or [N]
Y or [N
Identifies status of DS2 LOS alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
Identifies status of DS2 RAI alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
61200290L1-1G
9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Table 9-8 contains entries that are used to edit or retrieve options for the DSX portion of the MX2800.
When performing TL1 edit commands from this table, the value of rr should be T1, and the <aid> value
should be one of the following:
101 - DS1#1
102 - DS1#2
.
.
.
128 - DS1#28
Table 9-8. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS1
Keyword
Type
Domain
Description
DIAGDSXTESTSTATE
ENUM
One of the following:
• DATAMODE
• TRIBUTARY
• ANALOGNET
• DIGNET
Identifies DSX Diagnostic Loopbacks.
Choose an available loopback
• CODEC
• REMLPBK
• CSULPBK
• CSUBERT
• LINEBERT
DSXCAISRLY
Y/N
Y or [N]
Identifies status of DSX CAIS alarm relay.
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
DSXCFGLINESWPROT
ENUM
One of the following:
• DISABLE
Identifies the state of the DSX Switch
Protection
• DISABLE - the switch is disabled
• ENABLE - the switch is enabled
• ENABLE
• UNAVAIL
• UNAVAIL - the switch is not in the
configuration
9-24
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Transaction Language 1 (TL1), Section 9
Table 9-8. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS1 (Continued)
Keyword
Type
Domain
Description
DSXCFGSTATE
ENUM
One of the following:
• DISABLE
• ENABLE
Identifies the DSX configuration state
• DISABLE - disables the current
configuration
• ENABLE - enable the newest
configuration
• UNAVAIL
• AUTO
• UNAVAIL - the configuration is
unavailable
• AUTO - the configuration is set to auto
save in nonvolatile memory
DSXCVTHRS
ENUM
One of the following:
• DISABLE
• 1E3
Indicates a limit on the number of code
violations accepted by the unit over a
single T1/E1 before the unit switches
controller cards
• 1E4
• 1E3 - 1 out of every 1,000 bits on a sin-
gle T1/E1 contains a CV
• 1E5
• 1E6
• 1E4 - 1 out of every 10,000 bits on a
single T1/E1 contains a CV
• 1E5 - 1 out of every 100,000 bits on a
single T1/E1 contains a CV
• 1E6 - 1 out of every 1,000,000 bits on a
single T1/E1 contains a CV
DSXLAISRLY
Y/N
Y or [N]
Identifies status of DSX LAIS alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
61200290L1-1G
9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Table 9-8. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS1 (Continued)
Keyword
Type
Domain
Description
DSXLBKDETECTION
ENUM
One of the following:
• DISABLE
• CSU
Identifies for each T1/E1 interface
whether the T1/E1 will respond to
loopback requests
• DISABLE - does not respond to
loopback tests
• NIU
• M13INBAND
• UNAVAIL
• CSU - cause the channel to loop up or
loop down when it receives a CSU loop-
up or loop-down pattern for more than 5
seconds
• NIU - cause the channel to loop up or
loop down when it receives an NIU
loop-up or loop-down pattern for more
than 5 seconds
• M13INBAND - cause the channel to
loop up or loop down when it receives
an M13INBAND loop-up or loop-down
pattern for more than 5 seconds
• UNAVAIL - T1/E1 not available for
loopback tests
DSXLOSRLY
Y/N
Y or [N]
Identifies status of DSX LOS alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
DSXPROTTHRS
DSXXCVRLY
INT
Y/N
1-28
Number of Enabled lines that must fail
before a protection switch occurs
Y or [N]
Identifies status of DSX XCV alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
LBO
ENUM
One of the following:
• 0TO133
Identifies the line length for each T1 inter-
face according to the distance from the
MX2800 to the DTE device
• 133TO266
• 266TO399
• 399TO533
• 533TO655
• MINUS7R5
• E10TO3000
• UNAVAIL
• 0TO133, 133TO266, 266TO399,
399TO533, 533TO655 - distance in feet
• MINUS7R5 - -7.5dB length
• E10TO3000 - setting for E1
• UNAVAIL - unavailable
9-26
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Transaction Language 1 (TL1), Section 9
Table 9-8. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for DS1 (Continued)
Keyword
Type
Domain
Description
LINECDE
ENUM
One of the following:
• AMI
Identifies line code for T1/E1s to match
connected devices
• AMI - set T1 to AMI
• B8ZS
• B8ZS - Sets T1 to B8ZS
• E1AMI - sets E1 to AMI
• E1HDB3 - sets E1 to HDB3
• UNAVAIL - no T1/E1 available
• E1AMI
• E1HDB3
• UNAVAIL
Table 9-9 contains entries that are used to edit or retrieve options for the equipment portion of the
MX2800. When performing TL1 edit commands from this table, the value of rr should be EQPT, and the
<aid> value should be one of the following:
400 - All EQPT identifiers
401 - Generic
402 - Control Card A
403 - Control Card B
404 - Power Supply A
405 - Power Supply B
Table 9-9. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for EQPT
Keyword
Type
Domain
Description
DIAGBERCLEARCOUNT
Y/N
Y or [N]
Clears BERT count
• Yes (Y) - clears the BERT count
• No (N) - does not clear the BERT count
DIAGBERTCOUNT
DIAGBERTSYNC
INT
0, 1, 2, ..., N
Error count
ENUM
One of the following:
• NOSYNC
Identifies state of Pattern Synchronization
• NOSYNC - there is no pattern sync
• SYNC - pattern sync is available
• SYNC
61200290L1-1G
9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Table 9-9. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for EQPT (Continued)
Keyword
Type
Domain
Description
DIAGLPBKTIMEOUT
ENUM
One of the following:
• DISABLE
• 1-MIN
Identifies the amount of time before a
Diagnostic Loopback will time out
• DISABLE - timeout is disabled
• 1-MIN - timeout value is one minute
• 5-MINL - timeout value is five minutes
• 10-MIN - timeout value is ten minutes
• 15-MIN - timeout value is 15 minutes
• 30-MIN - timeout value is 30 minutes
• 45-MIN - timeout value is 45 minutes
• 1-HR - timeout value is 60 minutes
• 2-HR - timeout value is 120 minutes
• 5-MINL
• 10-MIN
• 15-MIN
• 30-MIN
• 45-MIN
• 1-HR
• 2-HR
DIAGRESET
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y or [N]
Y or [N]
Y or [N]
Y or [N]
Y or [N]
Y or [N]
Resets Diagnostic Loopbacks
• Yes (Y) - reset the diagnostic loopback
• No (N) - do not reset the diagnostic
loopback
PSBATTERYLOWRLY
PSCHARGERFAILRLY
PSFANFAILRLY
Identifies status of Power Supply Battery
Low alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
Identifies status of Power Supply Charger
Fail alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
Identifies status of Power Supply Fan Fail
alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
PSMALFNCRLY
Identifies status of Power Supply
Malfunction alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
PSPOWERFAILRLY
Identifies status of Power Supply Power
Fail alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
9-28
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Transaction Language 1 (TL1), Section 9
Table 9-9. TL1 Editing Data Dictionary for EQPT (Continued)
Keyword
Type
Domain
Description
PSPOWERLOWRLY
Y/N
Y or [N]
Identifies status of Power Supply Power
Low alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
PSTEMPCRITRLY
PSTEMPHIGHRLY
Y/N
Y/N
Y or [N]
Y or [N]
Identifies status of Power Supply Temper-
ature Critical alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
Identifies status of Power Supply Temper-
ature High alarm relay
• Yes (Y) - enables alarm
• No (N) - disables alarm
61200290L1-1G
9-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
TL1 Loopback Commands
The OPR-LPBK and RLS-LPBK commands are provided as an alternative to ED commands to perform
loopbacks through TL1. The general format for these commands is as follows:
OPR-LPBK-{T1|T2|T3}:<tid>:<aid>:<ctag>::<locn>,,,<lpbktype>;
RLS-LPBK-{T1|T2|T3}:<tid>:<aid>:<ctag>::<locn>,,,<lpbktype>;
Table 9-10 describes each of the DS3 loopbacks that can be initiated or released with these commands.
Table 9-10. DS3 TL1 Loopback Commands
1
Verb
MOD2
<locn>
<lpbktype>
Description
<aid>
OPR
RLS
OPR
RLS
OPR
RLS
OPR
RLS
OPR
RLS
RLS
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
T3
3xy
3xy
3xy
3xy
3xy
3xy
3xy
3xy
3xy
3xy
3xy
NEND
NEND
NEND
NEND
NEND
NEND
FEND
FEND
FEND
FEND
LINE
Initiates the DS3 Line Loopback
LINE
Releases the DS3 Line Loopback
Initiates the DS3 Digital Loopback
Releases the DS3 Digital Loopback
Initiates the DS3 Network Loopback
Releases the DS3 Network Loopback
Initiates the DS3 Remote Loopback
Releases the DS3 Remote LoopbacK
Initiates the DS3 All T1/E1 Loopback
Releases the DS3 All T1/E1 Loopback
Releases any active DS3 Loopback
DIGLPBK
DIGLPBK
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
LINE
LINE
ALLT1
ALLT1
1. The value of xy may be 00 through 03.
Table 9-11 describes each of the DS2 loopbacks that can be initiated or released with these commands.
Table 9-11. DS2 TL1 Loopback Commands
*
Verb
MOD2
<locn>
<lpbktype>
Description
<aid>
OPR
RLS
RLS
T2
T2
T2
2xy
2xy
2xy
NEND
NEND
NETWORK
NETWORK
Initiates the DS2 Network Loopback
Releases the DS2 Network Loopback
Releases any active DS2 Loopback
*
The value of xy may be 01 through 07, corresponding to the desired DS2 channel.
9-30
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Transaction Language 1 (TL1), Section 9
Table 9-12 describes each of the DS1 loopbacks that can be initiated or released with DS1 TL1 loopback
commands.
Table 9-12. DS1 TL1 Loopback Commands
*
Verb
MOD2
<locn>
<lpbktype>
Description
<aid>
OPR
RLS
OPR
RLS
OPR
RLS
T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
1xy
1xy
1xy
1xy
1xy
1xy
NEND
NEND
NEND
NEND
NEND
NEND
NETWORK
NETWORK
TERMINAL
TERMINAL
DIGNET
Initiates the DS1 Tributary Loopback
Releases the DS1 Tributary Loopback
Initiates the DS1 Analog Loopback
Releases the DS1 Analog Loopback
Initiates the DS1 Digital Line/Net Loopback
DIGNET
Releases the DS1 Digital Line/Net
Loopback
OPR
RLS
OPR
RLS
OPR
RLS
OPR
RLS
RLS
T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
1xy
1xy
1xy
1xy
1xy
1xy
1xy
1xy
NEND
NEND
FEND
FEND
FEND
FEND
FEND
FEND
CODEC
Initiates the DS1 Codec Line/Net Loopback
Releases the DS1 Codec Line/Net Loopback
Initiates the DS1 Remote Loopback
Releases the DS1 Remote Loopback
Initiates the DS1 CSU Loopback
CODEC
DS1FEAC
DS1FEAC
CSULPBK
CSULPBK
CSUBERT
CSUBERT
Releases the DS1 CSU Loopback
Initiates the DS1 CSU Loopback w/BERT
Releases the DS1 CSU Loopback w/BERT
Releases any active DS1 Loopback
*
The value of xy may be 01 through 28, corresponding to the desired DS1 channel.
61200290L1-1G
9-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 9, Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
9-32
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX A, ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURE
Appendix A
Acceptance Test Procedure
1. INTRODUCTION
This appendix describes the procedures to be used in performing acceptance testing of ADTRAN’s Total
Access MX2800 M13 Multiplexer. It is assumed that the MX2800 has already been installed, powered-up,
equipped and cabled to the DSX-1 and DSX-3 or connecting equipment according to the specifications
The MX2800 is an M13 multiplexer used to consolidate 28 DS1 circuits on to a DS3. The unit can be
equipped in various ways. In general, this section addresses the following areas:
• Verifying the options installed on the unit
• Configuring the unit for test
• Testing all DS1 and DS3 circuits to make sure that each circuit passes error free data
• Verifying that alarms are generated and passed to external alarm systems
• Testing the system power supply and controller card redundancy
• Restoring the unit to the desired configuration
• Configuring the unit for customer traffic
• Completing the Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) Checklist
2. VERIFYING THE INSTALLED OPTIONS
The installed configuration determines the level of redundancy the unit supports. There may be one or two
Power Supply Units (PSUs) and Controller Card Units (CCUs) present. A single PSU and CCU are
required for operation without redundancy. Equipping the shelf with two of each provides full redundancy.
The PSUs are the smaller modules on the left side. The CCUs are the larger modules toward the center and
right of the shelf. Visually note which cards are installed in the chassis under test.
61200290L1-1G
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A, Acceptance Test Procedure
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
If this card is installed...
Check
Power Supply A (far left slot) installed?
Power Supply B (next slot to right) installed
Controller A (lower controller card) installed
Controller A (upper controller card) installed
3. CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM
Before the required tests can be performed, a minimal amount of configuration must be performed on the
MX2800. It is necessary to gain access to the Provisioning menus through the Craft Port, then set the
desired parameters for the DS1 ports, the DS3 port, and the alarm attributes. The following paragraphs step
through the process.
Accessing the Craft Port
The MX2800 is shipped with a flat silver-satin cable that plugs into the Craft jack on the front panel and a
DB-9 adapter that allows the cable to plug into the COM port on a computer or dumb terminal. Make these
connections, then start up a terminal emulation program on a computer (e.g., HyperTerminal, Procomm,
Crosstalk, etc.), using VT100 emulation with a character format of 9600 baud, no parity, eight bits, and one
stop bit. Press the ENTER key several times. A username prompt should appear. The default username is
“username”. The default password is “password”. The input characters for username and password are not
case sensitive. After the logon and password are accepted, the MX2800 Main Menu should appear. This is
the screen from which all other management and control functions are accessible.
Provisioning the DS3 Port
In order for the MX2800 to correctly pass traffic through the system, the DS3 and DS1 ports need to be
properly configured. The provisioning of the DS3 port is covered in this subsection, and the provisioning
of the DS1 ports is covered in the next.
NOTE
The ENTER key is used to select a function, and the ESC key is used to
back up a level in the menu system.
Follow these procedures to configure DS3 ports.
1. From the Main Menu, select Configuration, and then select Network Interface. The Network
Configuration screen should appear. Set each of the options on this screen as referenced below.
A-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Acceptance Test Procedure, Appendix A
NOTE
To change an option, simply enter the corresponding number, press
ENTER, and follow the prompts.
DS3 Configuration
• Framing = C-Bit (default = M13)
• Line Length = Use 0-225 ft. (default) or 225-450 ft., depending on the distance to the DS3 Cross
connect panel or connecting equipment.
• Timing = Local (default = Loop)
NOTE
When performing tests to a DS3 loopback, the timing must be set to Local
to guarantee DS3 frame synchronization and error-free testing during bit
error tests. Normal operation generally requires that this attribute be set
back to Loop (system default) after all acceptance tests are completed.
One exception to the rule is when connecting two MX2800s together on a
back-to-back basis (DS3s facing one another). In that case, one MX2800
must be set to Local and the other to Loop.
• Remote Loopbacks = FEAC/C-Bit (default)
• XCV Threshold = Disabled (default)
Protection Configuration
• Active Controller = A (default)
• Network Protection = Disabled (default)
• Max Switch Threshold = 3 (default)
• Min. Switching Period (sec.) = 10 (default)
Miscellaneous
• Loopback Time Out = 5 min. (default)
DS2 Configuration
• DS2 #1 = M12(4xT1)
• DS2 #2 = M12(4xT1)
• DS2 #3 = M12(4xT1)
• DS2 #4 = M12(4xT1)
• DS2 #5 = M12(4xT1)
61200290L1-1G
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A, Acceptance Test Procedure
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
• DS2 #6 = M12(4xT1)
• DS2 #7 = M12(4xT1)
NOTE
For additional information about the previous configuration, refer to
2. Press the ESC key to get back to the main Configuration menu.
Provisioning the DS1 Ports
1. From the main Configuration menu, select T1/E1 Interface. The Configure T1/E1 Interface menu
should appear. Since there are 28 DS1 ports to configure and all of them need to be set identically dur-
ing acceptance testing, the Set Multiple provisioning feature of the MX2800 is used during this step.
To use the Set Multiple feature, select the attribute from the Configure T1/E1 Interface screen. From the
Set Multiple screen, confirm that First = 1 and Last = 28. If not, make the necessary corrections. Select
State to toggle the State as necessary until the correct setting is displayed, and select Apply settings to
set all 28 DS1s to that mode. Press ESC twice to return to the Configure T1/E1 Interface menu.
2. Select T1/E1 State. If all channels are set to Auto Enable (default), press ESC to get back to the
Configure T1/E1 Interface menu and proceed to the next step. If not, perform the Set Multiple routine
referenced above.
3. Select T1/E1 Line Coding. If all channels are set to B8ZS (default), press ESC to get back to the
Configure T1/E1 Interface menu and proceed to the next step. If not, perform the Set Multiple routine
accordingly.
4. Select T1/E1 Line length. If all channels are set correctly (0-133, 133-266, 266-399, 399-533 or 533-
655 feet) as appropriate for the installation, proceed to the next step. If not, perform the Set Multiple
routine accordingly.
5. Select T1/E1Loopback Detection.
6. Select Set Multiple. Set First to 1, Last to 28, Loopback Detection to Disabled. Select Apply Settings.
7. Press ESC twice to return to the Configure T1/E1 Interface menu.
8. Select T1/Circuit Protection.
9. Select Set Multiple. Set First to 1 and Last to 28. Set Circuit Protection to Enabled. Select Apply
Settings.
10. Press ESC once and select Protection Threshold. Enter a value of 1 and press ESC once to return to the
Configure T1/E1 Interface menu.
11. Select XCV Threshold. Select Disabled.
12. Press the Esc key to get back to the main Configuration menu.
A-4
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Acceptance Test Procedure, Appendix A
Alarm Relay Configuration
Although there are numerous alarm configuration options available on the MX2800, the ability to generate
only one Critical and one Noncritical alarm are the only requirements for this part of the acceptance test
process. These requirements confirms that the alarm contacts are wired and operating correctly and trans-
mitting the appropriate alarm conditions back to the central office alarm panel.
1. From the main Configuration menu, select System Management.
2. Select Alarm Relay Configuration to get to the Alarm Relay Configuration screen.
3. As necessary, toggle the DS3 LOS state to Enabled, thus forcing generation of a Critical alarm when
the DS3 port sees a Loss of Signal condition.
4. As necessary, toggle the LOS state to Enabled, thus forcing generation of a Noncritical alarm when a
DS1 port sees a Loss of Signal condition.
5. Toggle the SAVE CONFIG state.
4. VERIFYING THE DATA INTEGRITY
Now that the system has been properly provisioned for acceptance testing, proceed with the testing of the
system. The first key test is to verify that the MX2800 can pass traffic between the DS1 and DS3 ports.
Three different methods of testing are presented. One of the three should be selected based on test equip-
ment availability and network configuration. All of the tests are performed at the DSX-1 and DSX-3 cross-
connect bays or connecting equipment so that both the MX2800 circuitry and the office cabling are tested.
If problems are encountered during testing, refer to Section 4, Status and Section 5, Statistics for assistance
with problem determination.
DS1 Daisy-Chain to DS3 (Hard) Loopback
This test can be performed single-handedly, and it can be used only if DS1s are terminated at the DSX1. It
loads all 28 ports of the MX2800 with traffic at the same time, but it does not confirm DS3 cabling integ-
rity (transmit Vs. receive).
Equipment Required:
• 1 DS1 test set for running a BERT
• 28 DS1 bantam test cords
• 1 DS3 test cord
Follow these procedures to test the daisy-chain.
1. At the DSX-3 cross-connect panel or connecting equipment, loop the DS3 from the MX2800 back on
itself. Confirm that the MX2800 sees a good DS3 signal. The DS3 STATUS LED should be solid
green on the Active Controller, and the DS3 test set should be in frame synchronization with the
MX2800.
2. At the DSX-1 cross-connect panel, insert the Transmit output of the DS1 test set into the Input of the
first DS1 channel of the MX2800.
61200290L1-1G
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A, Acceptance Test Procedure
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
3. At the DSX-1, install a bantam test cord from the Output of the first DS1 channel to the Input of the
second; then connect a second bantam test cord from the Output of the second DS1 channel to the
Input of the third DS1 channel. Repeat this procedure for all 28 DS1 channels.
4. Connect the Output of the 28th DS1 channel to the Receive input of the DS1 test set.
5. Set the test set options for ESF/B8ZS, and run a standard BERT using QRSS or other preferred test
pattern(s).
6. All alarms should clear on the MX2800, and the BERT should run error free. Troubleshoot as
necessary.
7. Leave this test setup in place, as it will be used during the redundancy testing portion of this document.
DS1 to DS3 Head-to-Head Test
This test is ordinarily a two-person operation, and it is the preferred means of testing system and cabling
integrity. It tests one DS1 channel at a time, using a DS1 test set at the DSX-1 cross-connect panel or
connecting equipment and a DS3 test set at the DSX-3 or connecting equipment location.
Equipment Required:
• 1 DS1 test set capable of running a BERT
• 1 DS3 test set capable of accessing and running a BERT on a single DS1
Follow these procedures to execute the head-to-head test.
1. At the DSX-3 cross-connect panel or connecting equipment, properly connect the DS3 test set to the
DS3 coming from the MX2800. Confirm transmit and receive integrity, an integral step in the process.
2. Configure the DS3 test set for C-Bit Framing, the appropriate LBO, and set to drop out DS1 #1.
Configure the DS1 BERT to run in ESF/B8ZS mode using QRSS or other preferred test pattern.
Confirm that the MX2800 sees a good DS3 signal. The DS3 STATUS LED should be solid green on
the Active Controller, and the DS3 test set should be in frame synchronization with the MX2800.
3. At the DSX-1 cross-connect bay or connecting equipment, connect the DS1 test set to the first DS1
channel of the MX2800. Configure the test set for the same framing, line code, and BERT pattern as
the DS3 test set. Confirm a good, error-free BERT for a minimal period, such as 15 seconds.
4. Repeat for DS1 channels 2-28 by moving the DS1 test cables and reconfiguring the DS3 test set to
drop out the appropriate DS1 channel under test.
5. The MX2800 condition is in an alarm because of the previously tested and now unterminated DS1
ports, but this should not prohibit a successful BERT between the DS1 and DS3 test sets on the channel
under test.
6. Leave this test setup in place, as it will be used during the redundancy testing portion of this document.
A-6
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Acceptance Test Procedure, Appendix A
DS1 to DS3 (Hard) Loopback
This test requires minimal test equipment, tests one DS1 at a time, and can be performed single-handedly.
It does not verify DS3 cabling integrity (transmit Vs. receive) to the DSX3 or connecting equipment.
Equipment Required:
• 1 DS1 test set capable of running a BERT test
• 1 DS3 DSX test cord
Follow these procedures to test one DS1 at a time:
1. At the DSX-3 cross-connect panel or connecting equipment, loop the DS3 from the MX2800 back on
itself. Confirm that the MX2800 sees a good DS3 signal. The DS3 STATUS LED should be solid green
on the Active Controller, and the DS3 test set should be in frame synchronization with the MX2800.
2. At the DSX-1 cross-connect bay or connecting equipment, insert the Transmit output of the DS1 test
set to the DS1 Input of the first channel of the MX2800. Connect the Receive input of the test set to
the Output of the first DS1 channel of the MX2800.
3. Configure the DS1 test set for ESF/B8ZS and the desired BERT pattern, such as QRSS.
4. All alarms should clear on the MX2800, and the BERT should run error free. Troubleshoot as
necessary.
5. Repeat the above procedure for DS1 channels 2-28. The MX2800 will be in an alarm condition
because of the unterminated DS1 ports, but this condition should not prohibit a successful BERT.
6. Leave this test setup in place, as it will be used during the redundancy testing portion of this document.
5. VERIFYING ALARM NOTIFICATION
The MX2800 has two sets of alarm relay contacts available for connection to external alarm systems. They
are located on the back panel and are designated as Critical, and Noncritical. Normally Open and
normally Closed contacts are available for each of the relay outputs. The Critical alarm is activated when
the DS3 port experiences a Loss of Signal (LOS) event. The Noncritical alarm is activated when one of the
28 DS1 ports experiences a Loss of Signal event. Detailed alarm testing procedures are described below.
Critical Alarm Relay Test
This test actuates the Critical alarm relay contacts.
Equipment Required:
• 1 DS3 DSX test cord
Follow these procedures to test one the critical alarm relay.
1. Ensure that the DS3 is not in alarm. To do this, place a hard loopback of the DS3 toward the MX2800
using a test cord at the DSX-3 cross-connect panel or connecting equipment.
2. With the loopback in place, all alarms should clear on the Controller Module DS3 port. The DS3
STATUS LED should be solid green on the Active Controller).
61200290L1-1G
A-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A, Acceptance Test Procedure
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
3. Remove the loopback from the DS3 and ensure that no other DS3 signal is entering the MX2800
through the DSX-3 cross-connect bay or connecting equipment, such as DCS.
4. The MX2800 should go into Critical alarm, thus closing the relay contacts and sending the alarm to the
alarm monitoring equipment.
5. Verify that the alarm is being properly reported as a Critical alarm.
Noncritical Alarm Relay Test
This test actuates the Noncritical alarm relay contacts.
Equipment Required:
• 1 DS3 DSX test cord
Follow these procedures to test one the noncritical alarm relay.
1. Ensure that the DS3 is not in alarm. The DS3 STATUS LED should be solid green on the Active Con-
troller. To do this, re-install a hard loopback of the DS3 toward the MX2800.
2. Ensure that the 28 DS1s are out of alarm. To accomplish this, proceed as follows:
a. At the DSX-1 cross-connect, insert the Transmit of the DS1 test set into the Input of the first DS1
channel of the MX2800. Install a bantam test cord from the Output of the first DS1 channel to the
Input of the second DS1 channel. Then connect a second bantam test cord from the Output of the
second DS1 channel to the Input of the third DS1.
b. Repeat this procedure for all 28 DS1 channels. Connect the Output of the 28th DS1 channel to the
Receive of the DS1 test set. Configure the test set for ESF/B8ZS and run a standard BERT test
using QRSS or other preferred test pattern(s).
3. Nothing should be in alarm. The DS1 STATUS LEDs should all be solid green on the Active
Controller. Remove any one of the bantam cords from the DSX bay. Removing this cord causes a DS1
LOS alarm, which results in the actuation of the Noncritical alarm relay.
4. Verify that the Noncritical alarms are being properly reported to the office alarm monitoring
equipment.
6. VERIFYING SYSTEM REDUNDANCY
This section addresses the redundancy features of the MX2800. The MX2800 supports redundancy of both
the Power Supply and Controller Modules. The equipment configuration (nonredundant vs. redundant and
type of power redundancy) are useful in determining what can and cannot be tested. The following sections
describe the tests for various configurations.
Power Supply Redundancy
When installed, the MX2800 can be wired to have either one or two –48 VDC power feeds A and B. In
addition, the MX2800 chassis can be equipped with either one or two Power Supply modules. Test scenar-
ios for the two most common configurations follow. Testing of the other configurations is a subset of the
following.
A-8
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Acceptance Test Procedure, Appendix A
Single Power Supply Module / Dual Power Feeds
When the MX2800 is equipped with only a single Power Supply module, there is no protection against a
failure of the module itself. However, the single Power Supply is capable of utilizing the A and B power
feeds to protect against a failure in one of the power sources feeding the shelf. To verify that the MX2800
is properly utilizing the A and B power feeds, the following procedure is recommended:
1. With the MX2800 installed and operating normally, go to the fuse panel at the top of the bay and
remove the fuse corresponding to the A power feed for the MX2800 shelf. Removing this fuse should
have no effect on the operation of the shelf because the MX2800 is operating on the B power feed.
2. Reinsert the fuse for the A power feed.
3. Now, remove the B power feed fuse for the MX2800 shelf. Once again, there should be no effect on
the operation of the shelf because the MX2800 is operating on the A power feed.
4. Reinsert the fuse for the B power feed.
Dual Power Supply Modules / Dual Power Feeds
When the MX2800 is equipped with two Power Supply modules and also wired to support dual power
feeds, the shelf is protected against a failure of either of the Power Supply cards or a failure of one of the
power sources feeding the shelf. Use the following procedure to confirm the operation of this fully redun-
dant configuration:
1. With the MX2800 installed and operating normally, remove the A Power Supply card (the one on the
left). Removing this card should have no effect on the operation of the shelf because the MX2800 is
operating on the B Power Supply.
2. Go to the fuse panel at the top of the bay and remove the fuse corresponding to the A power feed.
Removing this fuse should have no effect on the operation of the shelf because the B Power Supply is
running on the B power feed.
3. Reinsert the fuse for the A power feed.
4. Remove the fuse corresponding to the B power feed to the shelf. Doing so should have no effect on the
operation of the shelf as the B Power Supply is operating on the A power feed.
5. Reinsert the fuse for the B power feed.
6. Reinsert the A Power Supply into the MX2800 chassis.
7. Remove the B Power Supply card (the one on the right). Doing so should have no effect on the
operation of the shelf because the MX2800 is operating on the A Power Supply.
8. Go to the fuse panel at the top of the bay and remove the fuse corresponding to the A power feed.
Removing this fuse should have no effect on the operation of the shelf because the A Power Supply is
now running on the B power feed.
9. Reinsert the fuse for the A power feed.
10. Remove the fuse corresponding to the B power feed to the shelf. Removing this fuse should have no
effect on the operation of the shelf as the A Power Supply is operating on the A power feed.
11. Reinsert the fuse for the B power feed.
12. Reinsert the B Power Supply into the MX2800 chassis.
61200290L1-1G
A-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A, Acceptance Test Procedure
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
13. Confirm that both power supplies and power feeds are functioning as normal. Front panel LEDs
identify problems with the power supplies, but the inputs can be tested only via VOM.
Controller Card Redundancy
The MX2800 can be equipped with either one or two Controller cards. The Controller contains all of the
MX2800's critical circuitry, including the DS3 interface, DS1 interfaces, management and communica-
tions hardware/firmware, etc. If the MX2800 is equipped with only one Controller, there is no protection
against failure. If a failure does occur to the Controller, an alarm is initiated; and the front panel LEDs
reflect the condition. The ACT LED is either solid or flashing red.
If the MX2800 is equipped with two Controller modules, all traffic is protected and can be switched over
to the Standby Controller in the event of a card failure. The following procedures demonstrate the
functionality of a Controller switchover:
1. Using the BERT setup that should still be in place from previous testing, ensure that the system is still
passing traffic error free.
2. Log into the MX2800 (if necessary) via the craft port to get to the Main Menu screen. From there,
select Configuration, followed by Network Interface and Active Controller.
3. This procedure shows which Controller (A or B) is currently Active. If the A Controller is Active,
select Controller B as the Active Controller. Doing so forces a switch to the B Controller, which is
acting as a hot standby. If the B Controller is the Active Controller, force a switch to the A Controller.
4. Traffic is interrupted momentarily during the switch but quickly returns to error-free performance
again on the new Controller.
5. Although either Controller can be the Active Controller, for consistency, the A Controller should be
left as the Active one.
NOTE
Repeat the log-in sequence in Step 2 after each protection switch.
7. RESTORING DEFAULT SETTINGS
After all Acceptance Tests have been successfully completed, the MX2800 can be restored to its default
settings by following the procedures below:
1. Log into the MX2800, if necessary, via the craft port. From the Main Menu, select Configuration,
followed by Utilities and Load Default Settings.
2. Once the settings have been retrieved and loaded into the system, Command Acceptedappears at
the bottom of the screen. The Standby Controller always maintains an exact copy of the Active
Controller’s attributes. Confirm that all settings are as expected via the craft port.
3. Normalize all loopbacks as appropriate, and restore all cabling and DSX panels to normal.
Office and Autonomous alarms may be generated as a result of performing Step 3, above. DS3 alarms can
be cleared by looping the DS3 back toward the MX2800 and setting the MX2800 Timing to Local via the
A-10
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Acceptance Test Procedure, Appendix A
craft port by selecting Configuration, Network Interface and Timing from the Main Menu, or by ensuring
continuity to and proper provisioning of the MX2800 and connecting equipment.
At the DS1 level, the MX2800 has three Service States. They operate as follows:
• Disabled – No signal continuity exists through the MX2800, and no alarms are detected or transmitted.
• Enabled – Signal continuity and alarming are always enabled.
• Auto Enable (default) – Signal continuity and alarming exist only after a DS1 signal is detected at the
DS1 input to the MX2800. Once a signal is detected, the only way to disable alarming is to momentarily
toggle the DS1 channel to the Disable state as follows:
From the Main Menu, select Configuration, T1/E1 Interface and T1 State. From the T1/E1 State screen,
enter the DS1# in question; then disable signal continuity and alarm transmission. Repeat the process of
selecting the DS1 from the T1/E1 State screen, but this time select Auto Enable to once again provision the
slot/channel for service. No alarms are transmitted until a DS1 signal has been detected and removed, or an
unframed signal is detected.
8. CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM FOR TRAFFIC READINESS
After the previous tests are successfully completed and the default settings are restored, the MX2800 can
be considered ready for customer traffic. Specific provisioning of the DS3, DS1, and other options is deter-
mined by circuit orders and local practices.
61200290L1-1G
A-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A, Acceptance Test Procedure
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
9. SIGNING-OFF THE MX2800 ATP CHECKLIST
Table A-1. MX2800 ATP Checklist
Acceptance Test Procedure Steps
Completed
Verifying the Installed Options
Dual Power Supplies / Dual Power Feeds
Dual Power Supplies / Single Power Feed
Single Power Supply / Dual Power Feeds
Single Power Supply / Single Power Feed
Dual Controllers
Single Controller
Configuring the System
Accessing the Craft Port
Provisioning the DS3 Port
Provisioning the DS1 Ports
Alarm Relay Configuration
Verifying the Data Integrity
DS1 Daisy-Chain to DS3 (Hard) Loopback
DS1 to DS3 “Head-to-Head” Test
DS1 to DS3 (Hard) Loopback
Verifying Alarm Notification
Critical Alarm Relay Test
Noncritical Alarm Relay Test
Verifying System Redundancy
Redundancy Tests (Power Supply and Power Feed as appropriate)
Controller Card Redundancy Test
Autonomous Alarm Reporting
Restoring Default Settings
Configuring the System for Traffic Readiness
NAME:
DATE:
LOCATION:
RELAY RACK:
A-12
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX B, PINOUTS
Appendix B
Pinouts
Table B-1, Table B-2, Table B-3, and Table B-4 list the pin assignments for the connectors located on the
Table B-1. Craft Port Pin Assignments
RJ Pin#
DB-9
Function
Direction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-
5
7
3
6
2
8
4
1
9
GND
RTS
I
I
TD
DSR
RD
O
O
O
I
CTS*
DTR
DCD
not used
O
-
* Used for hardware flow control.
Table B-2. LAN Port Pin Assignments
Description
Pin
Name
1
TD+
The positive signal for the TD differential pair. This signal contains
the serial output data stream transmitted onto the network.
2
3
TD-
The negative signal for the TD differential pair (pins 1 and 2).
RD+
The positive signal for the RD differential pair. This signal contains
the serial input data stream received from the network.
4, 5
6
N/A
RD-
N/A
not used
The negative signal for the RD differential pair (pins 3 and 6).
not used
7, 8
61200290L1-1G
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B, Pinouts
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Table B-3. Modem Port Pin Assignment
Pin
Description
1,2,3
4
Not used
tip
5
Ring
6,7,8
Not used
NOTE
The modem port assignment apply only to units equipped with an
internal modem (P/N4200290L1, P/N4200290L2, P/N4200290L3, and P/
N4200290L4).
Table B-4. Amphenol Pin Assignments
Pin
Function
Pin
Function
1
2
RING 1
RING 2
RING 3
RING 4
RING 5
RING 6
RING 7
RING 8
RING 9
RING 10
RING 11
RING 12
RING 13
RING 14
RING 15
RING 16
RING 17
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
TIP 1
TIP 2
3
TIP 3
4
TIP 4
5
TIP 5
6
TIP 6
7
TIP 7
8
TIP 8
9
TIP 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
TIP 10
TIP 11
TIP 12
TIP 13
TIP 14
TIP 15
TIP 16
TIP 17
B-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Pinouts, Appendix B
Table B-4. Amphenol Pin Assignments (Continued)
Pin
Function
Pin
Function
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
RING 18
RING 19
RING 20
RING 21
RING 22
RING 23
RING 24
RING 25
RING 26
RING 27
RING 28
N/A
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
TIP 18
TIP 19
TIP 20
TIP 21
TIP 22
TIP 23
TIP 24
TIP 25
TIP 26
TIP 27
TIP 28
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
FGND
FGND
NOTE
61200290L1-1G
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B, Pinouts
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
This page is intentionally blank.
B-4
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPEANDIXpC,pSPeECnIFICdATIiOxNS SCUMMARY
Specifications Summary
1. INTRODUCTION
This appendix describes the standard specifications and features incorporated in the MX2800.
2. SPECIFICATIONS AND FEATURES
The specification and features paragraphs are as follows:
• DSX-3 Network Interface
• DSX-1 Interface(s)
• Clocking
• Loopbacks
• Management
• Alarms
• Agency Approvals
• Environment
• Power
• Physical
DSX-3 Network Interface
Channelized DS3
Line length: short (less than 225 ft.) and long (greater than 225 ft.)
Framing format: M13 and C-bit parity
Line rate: 44.736 Mbps
Line interface: dual 75-ohm BNC coax female connectors
DSX-1 Interface(s)
Line length: 0-655 feet
Line rate: 1.544 Mbps
Line code: AMI or B8ZS
Line interface(s): two 64-pin amphenol connectors
61200290L1-1G
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C, Specifications Summary
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Clocking
Network: receive from DS3 network
Local: internally generated
External: receive from T1/E1 port or BITS clock from wire-wrap pins on back of chassis
Loopbacks
DS3 Network
ANSI T1.107 compatible loopbacks
Line loopbacks
DS2 Interfaces
DS2 network loopbacks
DSX-1 Interfaces
Local and network loopbacks
Management
Supported by Total Access Element Management System (JAVA application that provides configuration,
performance, network assurance, and provisioning functions). Refer to www.adtran.com website product
area for additional information.
Supported by ADVISION (graphical user interface (GUI) SNMP management tool integrated into HP
additional information.
VT100 Terminal Interface
RJ-48, EIA-232 compatible, female DB-9 adapter provided
Integrated Modem Interface (4200290L1, 4200290L2, 4200290L3, 4200290L4)
Dial up access for VT100, SNMP, or Telnet
Dial out “Cry for help”
SNMP/Telnet
Integrated 10Base-T Ethernet
MIB II (RFC 1213), RFC 1215, and RFC 1407 compliant.
ADTRAN Enterprise MIB for extended monitoring and control/configuration
C-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Specifications Summary, Appendix C
Alarms
External alarm contacts for critical, major, and minor alarms
Normally Open (NO) and Normally Closed (NC) pinout
Front panel alarm cutoff switch
Agency Approvals
FCC Part 15, Class A, Part 68
Industry Canada CS03
UL and CUL
NEBS Level 3
Environment
Operating: –40°C to +65°C (–40°F to 149°F)
Storage: –40°C to +85°C (–40°F to 185°F)
Relative Humidity: Up to 95%, nonconducting
Power
AC version: 120VAC, 27W
DC version: –48 VDC, 30 W
DC version: +24VDC, 30 W
Physical
Dimensions: 7.86” D x 17.0” W x 1.7” H
Weight: 5.5 lbs. (redundant); 4.5 lbs. (nonredundant)
61200290L1-1G
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C, Specifications Summary
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
This page is intentionally blank.
C-4
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX D, ACRONYMS/ABBREVIATIONS
Appendix D
Acronyms/Abbreviations
A
ACO .............................alarm cut off
ACT..............................active
AIS................................alarm indication signal
ALM.............................alarm
AMI..............................alternate mark inversion
Amp..............................amphenol
ANSI.............................American National Standards Institute
async.............................asynchronous
B
BERT............................bit error rate test
bps ................................bits per second
BPV ..............................bipolar violation
C
CA.................................communications equipment available
CAIS.............................carrier side alarm indication signal
CCITT..........................Consultive Committee for International Telephony and Telegraphy
CCV..............................C-bit coding violation
CD.................................carrier detect
CES...............................C-bit errored seconds
CO ................................central office
CPE ..............................customer premise equipment
CRC..............................cyclic redundancy check
CS .................................clear to send
CSES ............................C-bit severely errored seconds
CSU ..............................channel service unit
CTS...............................clear to send
61200290L1-1G
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D, Acronyms/Abbreviations
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
CV.................................coding violation
D
dB .................................decibel
DBU..............................dial backup
DCD..............................data carrier detect
DCE..............................data communications equipment
DDS ..............................digital data service
DLCI ............................data link connection identifier
DS1 ...............................digital signal Level 1
DS3 ...............................digital signal Level 3
DSR ..............................data set ready
DSU ..............................data service unit
DSX-1...........................digital signal cross connect, Level 1
DTE..............................data terminal equipment
DTR..............................data terminal ready
E
ES .................................errored seconds
Eq .................................equipment
Eqpt..............................equipment
EXZ..............................excessive zeros
F
FBE...............................F-bit errors
FCC..............................Federal Communications Commission
FDL ..............................facility datalink
FEAC ...........................far-end alarm and control
FEBE............................far-end block error
H
HSSI .............................high-speed serial interface
I
IP ..................................internet protocol
K
KA ................................keep alive
D-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Acronyms/Abbreviations, Appendix D
L
LAIS.............................loop-side alarm indication signal
LAN..............................local area network
LCV..............................line coding violation
LED..............................light emitting diode
LES...............................line errored seconds
LIU ...............................line interface unit
LL.................................local loopback
LOF..............................loss of framing
LOS ..............................loss of signal
M
MBE .............................M-bit errors
Mbps.............................megabits per second
MIB ..............................management information base
ms .................................millisecond
N
NC.................................normally closed
NI..................................network interface
NMS .............................network management system
NO ................................normally open
NRZ..............................non-return to zero
NSA ..............................non-service-affecting
O
OCU .............................office channel unit
OOF..............................out of frame
OOS..............................out of service
P
PCV..............................P-bit coding violation
PES...............................P-bit errored seconds
POP ..............................point of presence
PPP...............................point-to-point protocol
PRF...............................performance
PSES.............................P-bit severely errored seconds
61200290L1-1G
D-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D, Acronyms/Abbreviations
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
PSTN............................public switched telephone network
PVC..............................permanent virtual circuit
R
RD.................................receive data
RDL..............................remote digital loopback
RL.................................remote loopback
RMA.............................return material authorization
RS .................................request to send
RTS...............................request to send
Rx .................................receive
S
SA .................................service affecting
SEFS.............................severely errored framing seconds
SES ...............................severely errored seconds
SLIP .............................serial line internet protocol
SNMP...........................simple network management protocol
SONET.........................synchronous optical network
SR .................................data set ready
SW56............................switched 56
sync...............................synchronous
T
TA.................................terminal equipment available
TD.................................transmit data
TDM.............................time division multiplexing
TM................................test mode
TR.................................data terminal ready
Tx..................................transmit
U
UAS ..............................unavailable seconds
W
WAN.............................wide area network
D-4
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Acronyms/Abbreviations, Appendix D
X
XCV..............................excessive coding violations
61200290L1-1G
D-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D, Acronyms/Abbreviations
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
This page is intentionally blank.
D-6
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX E, GLOSSARY
Appendix E
Glossary
10Base-T
Ethernet connector which implements the IEEE standard on 24-gauge, unshielded
twisted-pair wiring.
A
AMI
Alternate Mark Inversion. A bipolar line-coding format in T1 transmission
systems whereby successive ones are alternately inverted.
ANSI
American National Standards Institute. A nonprofit organization that coordinates
voluntary standards activities in the United States.
asynchronous
A method of data transmission which allows characters to be sent at irregular
intervals by preceding each character with a start bit followed by a stop bit.
B
bandwidth
The bandwidth determines the rate at which information can be sent through a
channel (the greater the bandwidth, the more information that can be sent in a
given amount of time).
baud rate
BERT
A measure of transmission speed over an analog phone line. Baud rate measures
the shortest signaling elements per second in the analog signal that a modem sends
over an analog phone line. Does not necessarily equal the bit rate.
Bit error rate test. A test that uses any of a number of stress patterns to test T3, T1,
FT1, and DDS circuits.
bipolar
A signal containing both positive and negative amplitude components.
bipolar violation
bit
A binary digit representing a signal, wave, or state as either a one or a zero. A bit
is the smallest unit of information a computer can process.
bit error
bit rate
bps
The receipt of an encoded bit that differs from what was sent by the transmitter.
The speed at which bits are transmitted, usually expressed in bits per second (bps).
Bits per second. The number of bits passing a specific point per second. Examples
of common rates are kbps (one thousand bits per second) and Mbps (one million
bits per second). T3 operates at 44.736 Mbps.
61200290L1-1G
E-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E, Glossary
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
BPV
Bipolar violation. A violation in the alternate mark inversion (AMI) line code in
which consecutive 1s are represented by pulses of opposite polarity. BPVs that are
not intentional (B8ZS) are counted as errors. Could also be the presence of two
consecutive 1 bits of the same polarity on the T-carrier line.
bridge
byte
A data communications device that connects two or more networks and forwards
packets between them.
Generally, an 8-bit quantity of information. This term is used mainly in referring
to parallel data transfer, semiconductor capacity, and data storage.
C
carrier
The provider of the telecommunication services to the customer site. Carriers can
be local telephone companies, regional telephone companies, or any inter-
exchange carrier such as AT&T, Sprint, or MCI.
C-bit
An overhead bit in the DS3 string not used for framing, parity, or alarm indication.
CCITT
Consultive Committee for International Telephony and Telegraphy. A standards
organization that devises and proposes recommendations for international
communications. See also ANSI.
CD
Carrier detect. A signal generated by a modem or DSU/CSU indicating the
presence of a carrier signal on a communications link.
channel
channel bank
A transmission path between two or more termination points, also called a circuit,
facility, line, link, or path.
Equipment in a telephone central office or customer premises that performs multi-
plexing of lower-speed digital channels into a higher-speed composite channel.
The channel bank also detects and transmits signaling information for each
channel, thereby transmitting framing information so that time slots allocated to
each channel can be identified by the receiver.
channel service
unit
clocking
An oscillator-generated signal that provides a timing reference for a transmission
link. A clock provides signals used in a transmission system to control the timing
of certain functions. The clock has two functions: (1) to generate periodic signals
for synchronization, and (2) to provide a time base.
CPE
Customer premises equipment. All telecommunications terminal equipment
located on the customer premises, including telephone sets, private branch
exchanges (PBXs), data terminals, and customer-owned, coin-operated
telephones.
E-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Glossary, Appendix E
craft port
CSU
The data communications interface between the MX2800 and the control termi-
nal. The control terminal is used to communicate commands to the unit.
Channel service unit. A device used to connect a digital phone line coming in
from the phone company to either a multiplexer, channel bank, or directly to
another device producing a digital signal; for example, a digital PBX, a PC, or
data communications device. A CSU performs certain line-conditioning and
equalization functions and responds to loopback commands sent from the central
office. A CSU also regenerates digital signals. It monitors them for problems and
provides a means of testing the digital circuit.
CTS
Clear to send. A signal on the DTE interface indicating that the DCE is clear to
send data.
D
data
communications
equipment
data service unit
dB
Decibel. A unit of measure of signal strength, usually the relation between a trans-
mitted signal and a standard signal source.
DCE
DDS
Data communications equipment. Device that provides all the functions required
for connection to telephone company lines and for converting signals between
Digital data service. A private line digital service for transmitting data end-to-end
at speeds of 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 56 kbps (and, in some cases, 19.2, 38.4, or 64 kbps).
The systems can use central hub offices for obtaining test access, bridging legs of
multi-point circuits, and cross connecting equipment. DDS is offered on an inter-
LATA (local access and transport area) basis by AT&T and on an intra-LATA
basis by the Bell operating companies.
delay
DLCI
The amount of time by which a signal is delayed. A round-trip transmission delay
measurement helps detect possible causes of protocol timeouts.
Datalink communications identifier. A unique number assigned to a PVC
endpoint in a frame relay network. Identifies a particular PVC endpoint within a
user's access channel in a frame relay network and has local significance only to
that channel.
DS1
DS3
Digital signal Level 1. Twenty-four DS0 channels make up one DS1. (Total
bandwidth is 1.544 Mbps.)
Digital signal Level 3. Equivalent of 28 DS1s and 672 DS0s. (Total bandwidth is
44.736 Mbps.)
61200290L1-1G
E-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E, Glossary
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
DSU
DTE
Data service unit. A device designed to transmit and receive digital data on digital
transmission facilities.
Data terminal equipment. The end-user terminal or computer that plugs into the
termination point (DCE) of a communications circuit. The main difference
between the DCE and the DTE is that Pins 2 and 3 are reversed.
E
E1
Transmission rates of 2.048 Mbps are available on T1 communication lines. See
end device
The ultimate source or destination of data flowing through a network (sometimes
referred to as DTE).
end user
ES
Subscriber who uses (rather than provides) telecommunications services.
Errored seconds. A second with one or more coding violations (CVs).
Transmission protocol for packet-switching LANs.
Ethernet
F
facilities
The equipment used by carriers to provide communication services.
far end
FCC
The distant end to that being considered. Not the end where testing is being
carried out.
Federal Communications Commission. The U.S. federal agency responsible for
regulating interstate and international communications by radio, TV, wire, satel-
lite, and cable.
FDL
Facility datalink. FDL bits provide overhead communication between the terminal
equipment in ESF framing.
G
gateway
A device which enables information to be exchanged between two dissimilar
systems or networks.
H
host computer
The primary or controlling computer in a multiple computer operation.
I
idle code
In a T3 circuit, an idle code consists of a sequence of 1100 over the entire payload
bandwidth.
in-band
Signaling (dialing, loopbacks, management, configuration, etc.) over the same
channel used for data.
E-4
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Glossary, Appendix E
IP
Internet protocol. A protocol which provides for transmitting blocks of data
between hosts identified by fixed-length addresses.
L
LAN
Local area network. A privately owned network that offers high-speed communi-
cations channels to connect information processing equipment in a limited
geographic area.
local loopback
(LL)
A type of test used to verify the operation of the local terminal equipment, the
CSU, and the connection between the two. The signal from the DTE is looped
back by the CSU and is sent back to the DTE.
loopback
LOS
The technique for testing the processing circuitry of a communications device.
May be initiated locally or remotely via a telecommunications circuit. Device
being tested will echo back received test data. The results are compared with the
original data.
Loss of signal. Defined as a line state in which no pulses are received for 175 bit
positions.
M
M13
DS1/DS3 multiplexer that combines up to 28 DS1 channels into one DS3 channel.
Uses two-stage, bit synchronous TDM.
Mbps
MIB
Megabits per second (one million bits per second).
Management information base. A database of network management information
used by SNMP.
modem
Acronym for modulator/demodulator. Equipment that converts digital signals to
and from analog signals. Used to send digital signals over analog phone lines.
monitor
To watch or listen to a signal non intrusively.
multi-point circuit
A single communications circuit that has more than two terminations.
N
NC
Normally closed. Relay switch contacts that remain closed when inactive.
The on-site unit.
near end
NI
Network interface. The demarcation point between the CPE and the PSTN.
Normally open. Relay switch contacts that remain open when inactive.
NO
61200290L1-1G
E-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E, Glossary
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
NRZ
Non return to zero. A mode in which the digital level is low for a 0 bit and high for
a 1 bit, and does not return to zero between successive 1 bits.
O
out-of-band
Signaling that is separated from the channel carrying information (voice, data,
video, etc.). Typically the separation is accomplished by a filter. The signaling
includes dialing and other supervisory signals.
P
point-to-point
Type of communications link that connects a single device to another single
device, such as a remote terminal to a host computer.
POP
Point of presence. Physical place within a LATA (local access and transport area)
where a long distance carrier or a cellular provider interfaces with the network of
the local exchange carrier (LEC). A POP is usually a building serving as the point
of termination which houses switches and transmission equipment.
protocol
PSTN
A set of rules controlling the orderly exchange of information between stations in
data communications networks or systems.
Public switched telephone network. Usually refers to the worldwide voice
telephone network available for public use.
R
red alarm
Unframed all ones signal (keep alive signal). A red alarm is declared on detection
of LOS or OOF not caused by an alarm indication signal (AIS) that persists for
more than two seconds.
remote
configuration
A feature designed into ADTRAN products that allows remote units to be config-
ured from a local unit or a VT100-compatible terminal.
router
A device that supports communications between networks. Routers are similar to
bridges, except that routers provide more functionality (such as finding the best
route between networks and providing network management capabilities).
S
service
The provision of telecommunications to customers by a common carrier, adminis-
tration, or private operating agency using voice, data, and/or video technologies.
service provider
SES
A company that delivers or sells a telecom service.
Severely errored seconds. A second in which more than 320 code violations
(CVs) occurred or an OOF condition occurred.
signaling
Communication between switches to set up and terminate calls.
E-6
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Glossary, Appendix E
SNMP
Simple network management protocol. A control and reporting scheme widely
used to manage devices from various vendors. SNMP operates on top of the Inter-
net protocol.
SONET
SR
Synchronous optical network. A standard format for transporting a wide range of
digital telecommunications services over optical fiber. SONET is characterized by
standard line rates, optical interfaces, and signal formats.
Data set ready. A signal on the DTE interface that indicates if a connection exists
and if the devices are ready to start handshaking control signals so communica-
tions can begin.
synchronous
Communications in which the timing is achieved by sharing a single clock. Each
end of the transmission synchronizes itself with the use of clocks and information
sent along with the transmitted data.
T
T1
Transmission rates of 1.544 Mbps are available on T1 communication lines. Also
T3
Transmission rates of 44.736 Mbps are available on T3 communication lines.
Also referred to as digital signal Level 3 (DS-3).
TDM
Time division multiplexing. A technique for transmitting two or more signals at
the same time over a single communication medium. This is accomplished by
allocating channels to the bandwidth for specific increments of time.
Telnet
The standard TCP/IP remote login protocol specified in RFC-854.
transceiver
A combination of transmitter and receiver, providing both output and input inter-
faces within a single device.
transmission
The signaling of data over telecommunications channels.
V
V.35
A standard for trunk interface between a network access device and a packet
network that defines signaling for data rates greater than 19.2 kbps.
VT100
A non intelligent terminal or terminal emulation mode used for asynchronous
communications. Used to configure the MX2800.
W
WAN
Wide area network. A communications network serving geographically separate
areas. A WAN typically extends a LAN outside the building to link to other LANs
over telephone lines.
61200290L1-1G
E-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E, Glossary
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Y
yellow alarm
A T3 yellow alarm is an indication sent back toward the source of a failed transmit
circuit in a DS3 two-way transmission path. The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to
zero.
E-8
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX F, WARRANTY
Appendix F
Warranty
1. WARRANTY AND CUSTOMER SERVICE
ADTRAN will replace or repair this product within the warranty period if it does not meet its published
specifications or fails while in service. Warranty information can be found at www.adtran.com/warranty.
Refer to the following subsections for sales, support, Customer and Product Service (CAPS) requests, or
further information.
2. ADTRAN SALES
Pricing/Availability:
800-827-0807
3. ADTRAN TECHNICAL SUPPORT
Pre-Sales Applications/Post-Sales Technical Assistance:
800-726-8663
Standard hours: Monday - Friday, 7 a.m. - 7 p.m. CST
Emergency hours: 7 days/week, 24 hours/day
4. ADTRAN REPAIR/CAPS
Return for Repair/Upgrade:
(256) 963-8722
5. REPAIR AND RETURN ADDRESS
Contact CAPS prior to returning equipment to ADTRAN.
ADTRAN, Inc.
CAPS Department
901 Explorer Boulevard
Huntsville, Alabama 35806-2807
61200290L1-1G
F-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F, Warranty
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
This page is intentionally blank.
F-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Index
Battery Low, Power Supply State 4-4
baud rate, setting 3-20
BERT
Numerics
24 Hour Alarm History
DS2 Statistics menu 5-9
DS3 Statistics menu 5-2
CSU Loopback w/ 6-4
Line
A
Bipolar Violations 5-13
blue alarm
network state 4-2
Remote status 4-3
breakout panel
overview 1-3
C
CAIS
acknowledgment messages
ACT LED, active cards 2-16
ACT LED, standby cards 2-17
Active Controller menu 3-6
Active state, Card A/Card B 4-5
agent, SNMP 1-3
AIS
T1/E1 State 4-6
Card A/Card B
Active state 4-5
24 Hour Alarm History (DS3 statistics) 5-2
Remote status 4-3
Failure
Not Installed 4-5
AIS Carrier Alarms 5-13
AIS Loop Alarms 5-13
alarm events 9-11
Alarm menu
System State 4-4
alarms
Card A/Card B menu 4-5
Card Comm menu 4-5
Card Failure
System State Alarm 4-4
C-Bit Coding Violations (CCV) 5-8
C-Bit Errored Seconds (CES) 5-8
C-bit parity
system
remote loopback 6-4
ALM LED, active cards 2-16
ALM LED, standby cards 2-17
Analog Loopback, remote all T1/E1 6-8
Analog Network loopback test 6-3
Answer on Ring menu 3-20
Auto Save menu 3-38
C-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) 5-8
Charger Fail, Power Supply State 4-4
circuit protection mode 4-5
Clear All Local DS3 Statistics 5-9
Clear All T1/E1 Alarm Counts 5-13
clearing statistics 5-9
codec line/net loopback 6-4
Common Eqpt Fail (NSA) Remote status 4-3
Configuration menus
B
backup protection
non-redundant power mode 8-1
power supply and source recovery mode 8-2
power supply recovery mode 8-2
battery backup, overview 1-4
Network Interface 3-4
Save Configuration 3-44
Utilities
Connection Timeout menu 3-20
61200290L1-1G
I-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Controller Traps 3-22
FEAC
craft port pin assignments B-1
CSU Loopback 6-4
CSU Loopback w/BERT 6-4
D
data link state 4-2
Date & Time menu 3-33
date, setting 3-33
Dial String menu 3-19
Dialout On Trap menu 3-20
digital line/net loopback 6-3
digital loopback 6-7
DS1 Eqpt Fail (NSA) 4-3
DS1 Eqpt Fail (SA), Remote status 4-3
DS2 Configuration menu 3-7
DS2 State
Frame ID menu 3-36
G
Gateway IP Address menu 3-17
H
Hangup menu 3-21
Host Facility menu 3-37
Host IP Address menu 3-37
HOT, T1/E1 State 4-6
I
Idle
24 Hour Alarm History (DS3 statistics) 5-3
Remote status 4-3
State
Idle Timeout menu 3-19
In Test, DS3 State 4-2
informational events 9-11
Initializing String menu 3-19
Interval starting at:, Performance Parameters (DS3)
IP address trap 3-21
IP Hosts menu 3-33
IP Security menu 3-33
AIS
LOF
OK
RAI
DS2 Statistics menu 5-9
DS3 Configuration menu 3-4
DS3 Eqpt Fail (NSA) 4-3
DS3 Eqpt Fail (SA) 4-3
DS3 Loopbacks 6-6
L
LAIS
T1/E1 State 4-6
DS3 State
LAN pin assignments B-1
LAN port, MX2800 2-7
Last Modem Response menu 3-21
LEDs
Alarm
In Test
Normal
DS3 State menu 4-1
ACT, active cards 2-16
ACT, standby cards 2-17
ALM, active cards 2-16
ALM, standby cards 2-17
NET, active cards 2-16
NET, standby cards 2-17
PRF, active cards 2-16
PRF, standby cards 2-17
Line BERT 6-5
Line Coding menus, T1/E1 3-10
Line Coding Violation (LCV) 5-8
Line Coding Violations (LCV) 5-8
Line Errored Seconds (LES) 5-8
Line Length menu
DS3 Statistics menu 5-2
DSX-1/E1 interfaces, rear panel 2-8
DSX-3 interfaces, rear panel 2-7
E
Equipment Code menu 3-37
Error, Power Supply State 4-4
establishing a terminal connection 2-9
Excessive CV, State 4-2
Excessive Switches, System State Alarm 4-4
F
Facility ID menu 3-36
Failure, Card A/Card B 4-5
fan faceplate, overview 1-4
Far End Block Errors (FEBE) 5-9
F-Bit Errors (FBE) 5-8
long
short
Line Length menus, T1/E1 3-11
I-2
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Index
Line Loopback 6-7
Modem port, MX2800 2-7
Local IP Address menu 3-17
Location ID menu 3-36
LOF
Multiple DS1 LOS, Remote status 4-3
MX2800 options 1-3
MX2800 Product Overview 1-1
24 Hour Alarm History (DS3 statistics) 5-2
N
navigating the menus 2-10
NET LED, active cards 2-16
NET LED, standby cards 2-17
Network Interface menus 3-4
network manager, SNMP 1-2
network protection mode 4-5
none, Protection mode 4-5
non-redundant power mode 8-1
Normal
State
logging out 2-15
long line length 3-4
loopback
CSU
CSU with BERT 6-4
DS2
DS3
T1/E1
Power Supply State 4-4
Remote status 4-3
Loopback menu
Analog Network 6-3
Codec Line/Net 6-4
CSU Loopback 6-4
CSU Loopback w/BERT 6-4
Digital Line/Net 6-3
Digital Loopback 6-7
DS2 Loopback 6-9
DS2 Network 6-9
DS3 Loopbacks 6-6
Line BERT 6-5
Line Loopback 6-7
Not Installed, Card A/Card B 4-5
O
OK
T1/E1 state 4-6
OOF
Remote status 4-3
options for the MX2800 1-3
output response messages 9-4
P
Pause Between Calls menu 3-20
P-Bit Coding Violations (PCV) 5-8
P-Bit Errored Seconds (CES) 5-8
P-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) 5-8
Performance Parameters (DS3)
Metallic Loopback 6-8
Remote all T1/E1 6-8
T1/E1 Loopbacks 6-2
Tributary 6-2
C-Bit Coding Violations (CCV) 5-8
C-Bit Errored Seconds (CES) 5-8
Loopback menu, network configuration 3-7
LOS
C-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) 5-8
Clear All Local DS3 Statistics 5-9
Far End Block Errors (FEBE) 5-9
F-Bit Errors (FBE) 5-8
24 Hour Alarm History (DS3 statistics) 5-2
Remote status 4-3
State
T1/E1 State 4-6
Interval starting at: 5-7
Loss of Signal Alarms 5-13
Line Coding Violation (LCV) 5-8
Line Coding Violations (LCV) 5-8
Line Errored Seconds (LES) 5-8
P-Bit Coding Violations (PCV) 5-8
P-Bit Errored Seconds (CES) 5-8
P-Bit Severely Errored Seconds (CSES) 5-8
Refresh All Remote Statistics 5-9
Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS) 5-8
Unavailable Seconds (UAS) 5-8
M
management station addresses 3-33
Maximum Redial Attempts menu 3-19
menu navigation 2-10
metallic loopback 6-8
MIB, SNMP 1-3
Miscellaneous menu 3-33
Miscellaneous menus, network configuration 3-7
Modem Mode menu 3-20
61200290L1-1G
I-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Performance Parameters menu (DS2) 5-11
Performance Parameters menu (DS3) 5-4
phone numbers
R
RAI
24 Hour Alarm History (DS3 statistics) 5-2
Remote status 4-3
primary
secondary 3-19
pin assignments
State
auxiliary port B-1
control connector B-1
Read Community Name 3-24
Read Community Name address 3-21
receiving inspection 2-1
LAN
redundancy
circuit and network failure recovery mode 7-3
circuit failure recovery mode 7-2
non-redundant mode 7-1
pinouts
power connection, rear panel 2-8
Power Fail, Power Supply State 4-4
power loss recovery
non-redundant power mode 8-1
power supply and source recovery mode 8-2
power supply recovery mode 8-2
Power Low
Refresh All Remote Statistics 5-9
refreshing remote statistics 5-9
remote loopback
DS3
T1/E1
Remote Loopbacks menu 3-5
Remote menu 4-3
Remote state
Power Supply State 4-4
power supply and source recovery mode 8-2
power supply recovery mode 8-2
Power Supply State
unknown 4-3
Remote status
Battery Low 4-4
Charger Fail 4-4
AIS
Common Eqpt Fail (NSA) 4-3
DS1 Eqpt Fail (NSA) 4-3
DS1 Eqpt Fail (SA) 4-3
DS3 Eqpt Fail (NSA) 4-3
DS3 Eqpt Fail (SA) 4-3
Idle
LOF
LOS
Error
Normal
Power Low 4-4
Temp Critical 4-4
Temp High 4-4
Power Supply State menu 4-4
power up
Multiple DS1 LOS 4-3
Normal
RAI
AC version 2-2
DC version 2-2
PRF LED, active cards 2-16
PRF LED, standby cards 2-17
Privilege Level 2-15
Protection Configuration menus 3-6
Protection menu 4-5
protection mode
Single DS1 LOS 4-3
resetting the system 3-43
Rx Framing menu 4-1
S
Save Configuration and Alarm Log menu 3-44
setting the baud rate 3-20
Circuit
setting the date 3-33
setting the time 3-33
Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS) 5-8
Severity Level menu 3-37
shipping, contents 2-1
Network 4-5
network failure recovery 7-3
None
non-redundant 7-1
short line length 3-4
Single DS1 LOS, Remote status 4-3
Protection Threshold 3-14
I-4
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
Index
SNMP Management Options 3-21
SNMP State 3-21
T1/E1 menus
Line Coding 3-10
SNMP State menu 3-21
SNMP, overview 1-2
specifications, MX2800 C-1
Stand By, Card A/Card B 4-5
State menu (DS3 State) 4-2
State menus, T1/E1 3-9
Statistics menu
State
T1/E1 State
CAIS
HOT
LAIS
LOS
OK
TST
24 Hour Alarm History (DS2) 5-9
24 Hour Alarm History (DS3) 5-2
Clear All T1/E1 Alarm Counts 5-13
DS2 Statistics 5-9
XCV
T1/E1 Statistics menu 5-13
Telnet, overview 1-3
DS3 Statistics 5-2
Performance Parameters (DS3) 5-4
T1/E1 Statistics 5-13
Temp Critical, Power Supply State 4-4
Temp High, Power Supply State 4-4
terminal connection, establishing 2-9
time, setting 3-33
Statistics menus 5-1
Status menu
TL1
Alarm (DS3 State) 4-2
Alarm (System State) 4-4
Card A/Card B 4-5
alarm events 9-11
autonomous messages 9-11
commands 9-5
Card Comm 4-5
Editing
Power Supply State 4-4
Protection 4-5
informational events 9-11
messages 9-3
responses 9-3
Remote
Rx Framing 4-1
State 4-2
TLOS, State 4-2
Transmission menu 3-37
Trap Community Name 3-25
Trap Generation menu 3-21
Trap IP Addresses menu 3-21
traps
System State 4-4
Subnet Mask menu 3-17
Supply Failure, System State Alarm 4-4
Switched, System State Alarm 4-4
Syslog Setup menu 3-37
system alarms 3-34
controller 3-22
for calls between primary and secondary num-
bers 3-19
System Name 3-25
for redialing 3-19
system reset 3-43
Tributary loopback 6-2
TST, T1/E1 State 4-6
U
Unavailable Seconds (UAS) 5-8
Unit ID Code menu 3-36
Unknown, Remote state 4-3
Utilities menu 3-38
System Security 3-26
System Security menu 3-26
System State Alarm
Card Failure 4-4
Excessive Switches 4-4
Supply Failure 4-4
Switched 4-4
V
System State menu 4-4
T
viewing statistical information 5-1
W
T1/E1 Line Length menu 3-11
Write Community Name 3-25
61200290L1-1G
I-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
MX2800 M13 Multiplexer User Manual
X
XCV
T1/E1 State 4-6
I-6
61200290L1-1G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
®
®
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
AC International Styling Iron AC2CIG User Manual
Acoustic Research Headphones ARW200 User Manual
ACR Electronics GPS Receiver PLB 350C User Manual
Addtron Technology Switch 9258 User Manual
Aiphone Intercom System IBG 2AD User Manual
Aiwa MP3 Player TA403 User Manual
AllTrade Air Compressor 835521 User Manual
American Dish Service Dishwasher 5 CD LF RF User Manual
AOC Lawn Mower E2437Fh User Manual
Behringer Car Amplifier EPQ1200 User Manual